Pioneer DVR DVR LX70 User Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating Environment  
CAUTION  
Operating environment temperature and humidity:  
+5 ºC to +35 ºC (+41 ºF to +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH  
(cooling vents not blocked)  
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not  
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.  
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect  
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from  
the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore,  
make sure the unit has been installed so that the  
power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC  
outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard,  
the power cord should also be unplugged from the  
AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time  
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in  
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or  
strong artificial light)  
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En  
VENTILATION CAUTION  
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space  
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat  
radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and  
10 cm at each side).  
(for example, when on vacation).  
D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En  
WARNING  
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for  
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the  
product, and to protect it from overheating. To  
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be  
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,  
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the  
This product is for general household purposes. Any  
failure due to use for other than household purposes  
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a  
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which  
requires repair will be charged for even during the  
warranty period.  
K041_En  
equipment on thick carpet or a bed.  
D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En  
POWER-CORD CAUTION  
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC  
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed  
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and  
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of  
this unit should be performed only by qualified  
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the  
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make  
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.  
Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the  
plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power  
cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a  
short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a  
piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the  
cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other  
cords. The power cords should be routed such that they  
are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord  
can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check  
the power cord once in a while. When you find it  
The equipment should be disconnected by removing  
the mains plug from the wall socket when left  
unused for a long period of time (for example, when  
damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized  
service center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En  
on vacation).  
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En  
For Taiwan exclusively  
Taiwanese two pin flat-bladed plug  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
01  
Contents  
01 Before you start  
What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Putting the batteries in the remote  
control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Using the remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Disc/content format playback  
compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
About the internal hard disk drive . . . . . . 12  
Symbols used in this manual . . . . . . . . . 13  
05 Recording  
About DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
About HDD recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Recorded audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . 34  
Using the built-in TV tuner . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Setting the picture quality/  
recording time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Basic recording from the TV. . . . . . . . . . 37  
Setting a timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Simultaneous recording and playback  
(Chase Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Recording from an external  
02 Connections  
Rear panel connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Front panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Using other types of video output . . . . . . 17  
Connecting to a cable box or satellite  
component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Automatic recording from a satellite  
tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Playing your recordings on other DVD  
players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Initializing recordable DVD discs . . . . . . 49  
DVD-RW Auto Initialize. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
receiver (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Connecting to a cable box or satellite  
receiver (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Connecting to an AV amplifier or  
receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . 23  
Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Plugging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
06 Playback  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Basic playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Using the Disc Navigator with recordable  
discs and the HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Using the Disc Navigator with  
03 Controls and displays  
playback-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Scanning discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . 58  
The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Displaying and switching subtitles. . . . . 60  
Switching DVD and DivX  
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
04 Getting started  
Switching on and setting up . . . . . . . . . . 29  
soundtracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Switching camera angles. . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Displaying disc information  
on-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
4
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
07 Playing and recording from a DV  
camcorder  
Playing from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . 64  
Recording from a DV camcorder. . . . . . . 64  
About DV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
12 The Disc Setup menu  
Basic settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Initialize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Finalize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Optimize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Initialize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
08 Editing  
Editing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
The Disc Navigator screen. . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
13 The Video Adjust menu  
Setting the picture quality for TV and  
external inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Setting the picture quality for disc  
09 Copying and backup  
playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
One Touch Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Using Copy Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Using disc backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
14 The Initial Setup menu  
Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . 108  
Selecting other languages for  
language options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
10 Using the Jukebox  
Copying music to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Copying files via USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Playing music from the Jukebox . . . . . . . 90  
Changing the display style of  
the Jukebox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
Copying albums/tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Editing the HDD Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
15 Additional information  
Minimum copying times. . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Manual recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
If the picture freezes and the front panel  
and remote control buttons stop  
working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
On-screen displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Front panel displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Setting up the remote to control  
11 The PhotoViewer  
Locating JPEG picture files . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Changing the display style of the  
your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . 134  
Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Condensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Moving the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
PhotoViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Playing a slideshow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Reloading files from a disc or  
USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Importing files to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Selecting multiple files or folders . . . . . . 97  
Copying files to a DVD-R/-RW . . . . . . . . . 97  
Copying selected files to  
a DVD-R/-RW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Editing files on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Printing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
5
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
Chapter 1  
Before you start  
• When disposing of used batteries,  
please comply with governmental  
regulations or environmental public  
instruction’s rules that apply in your  
country or area.  
What’s in the box  
Please confirm that the following  
accessories are in the box when you open it;  
• Remote control  
WARNING  
• AA/R6P dry cell batteries x 2  
• Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow)  
• RF antenna cable  
Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or  
other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or  
near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,  
overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the  
life or performance of batteries.  
D3-4-2-3-3_En  
• Power cable  
• These operating instructions  
Using the remote control  
Putting the batteries in the  
remote control  
Please keep in mind the following when  
using the remote control:  
• Make sure that there are no obstacles  
between the remote and the remote  
sensor on the unit.  
Insert two AA/R6P batteries into the  
battery compartment following the  
indications (,) inside the  
compartment.  
• Remote operation may become  
unreliable if strong sunlight or  
fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s  
remote sensor.  
• Remote controllers for different devices  
can interfere with each other. Avoid  
using remotes for other equipment  
located close to this unit.  
• Replace the batteries when you notice a  
fall off in the operating range of the  
remote.  
Important  
Incorrect use of batteries can result in  
hazards such as leakage and bursting.  
Please observe the following:  
• When the batteries run down or you  
change the batteries, the remote control  
mode is reset to Recorder 1. See Remote  
Control Mode on page 118.  
• Don’t mix new and old batteries  
together.  
• Don’t use different kinds of batteries  
together — although they may look  
similar, different batteries may have  
different voltages.  
• Use within the operating range in front of  
the remote control sensor on the front  
panel, as shown.  
• Make sure that the plus and minus ends  
of each battery match the indications in  
the battery compartment.  
7 m  
• Remove batteries from equipment that  
isn’t going to be used for a month or  
more.  
6
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
• You can control this recorder using the  
remote sensor of another Pioneer  
component via the CONTROL IN jack on  
the rear panel. See Rear panel  
connections on page 14 for more  
information.  
The following table shows older Pioneer DVD  
recorders’ limited compatibility with  
DVD-RW ver. 1.2 discs.  
Model  
Playable  
Recordable  
*1,2,3  
DVR-7000  
No  
Yes  
*1  
DVR-310  
DVR-510H  
No  
Yes  
Disc/contentformatplayback  
compatibility  
*1  
Discs should be finalized in this recorder before  
playing. Unfinalized VR mode and Video mode discs  
may not play.  
Compatible media  
• DVD-RW ver. 1.1 / 1x / 1x to 2x, ver. 1.2 /  
2x to 4x / 2x to 6x  
*2  
Cannot read the CPRM information will show in  
the display when you load a disc. However, this will not  
affect playback.  
*3  
• DVD-R ver. 2.0 / 1x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x /  
1x to 16x, ver. 2.1 / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x  
Copy-once protected disc titles will not play.  
• DVD+RW 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 3.3x to 8x  
Readable file system  
• DVD+R 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x /  
1x to 16x  
This recorder can play DVDs recorded under  
1
the following file systems : ISO 9660*,  
UDF 1.02, UDF 1.50, UDF 2.00, UDF 2.01.  
• DVD-RAM ver. 2.0 / 2x, ver. 2.1 / 2x /  
2x to 3x / 2x to 5x, ver. 2.2 / 2x / 2x to 3x /  
2x to 5x  
* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. Romeo and  
Joliet file systems are both compatible with  
this recorder.  
• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0 / 2x to 4x / 2x to 8x  
• DVD+R DL 2.4x / 2.4x to 8x  
Note that older models of DVD recorders and  
DVD writers may reject DVD-RW ver. 1.2  
discs and/or corrupt the data on the disc. If  
you want to share DVD-RW discs between  
this recorder and an older recorder/writer,  
we recommend using ver. 1.1 discs.  
Note  
1 • Depending on the recording technique used, even files recorded in compatible file systems may not play  
correctly.  
• MP3/WMA/DivX files can be played back when recorded onto a DVD that contains no video titles and uses the  
UDF 1.02, UDF 1.50, UDF 2.01 or ISO 9660 file systems.  
7
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
HDD/DVD Recording and playback compatibility  
This recorder can play and record all widely-used DVD disc types, and additionally provides  
HDD functionality. The table below shows some specific compatibility differences between  
the different disc types.  
DVD  
+RW  
DVD  
-RAM  
HDD  
DVD-R  
DVD-RW  
DVD+R  
Marks used in this  
manual  
HDD  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD (Video)  
*1 *1 *2  
DVD+RW  
DVD-RAM  
DVD+R  
*13, 16  
Logos  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*14  
Re-recordable/  
Erasable  
*4  
*4  
*4  
*4  
Editing of recorded  
programmes  
*12  
*12  
*12  
Recording of Copy-  
once protected  
material  
n/a  
*5  
*6  
*7  
*6  
*6, 15  
*8  
*9  
Playback in other  
players/recorders  
Chase play  
16:9 and 4:3  
programme  
recording  
*10, 11  
*11  
*11  
*11  
Dual mono/  
Bilingual broadcast  
recording of both  
audio channels  
*11 Only when the recording mode is not set to LPCM.  
*12 CPRM-compatible discs only.  
Notes to table  
*1 Must be initialized for VR mode recording  
(page 103).  
*13 Take the disc out of the cartridge before use. Only  
Panasonic and Maxell discs have been tested to work  
reliably with this recorder. Discs from other makers may  
become unusable when recorded or edited.  
*14 Erasing a title does not increase the available  
recording time, nor increase the number of recordable  
titles left.  
*15 Must be compatible with DVD+R playback.  
*16 Depending on the disc, it may have to be initialized  
before it can be recorded (page 103). In this case,  
initialization will take about an hour.  
*2 Must be initialized for Video mode recording  
(page 103).  
*3 Erasable, but free space does not increase.  
*4 Cannot erase sections, edit chapters or use playlist  
editing.  
*5 Must be compatible with DVD-R (VR) playback.  
*6 Finalize using this recorder (may not playback in  
some units) (page 48).  
*7 Must be compatible with DVD-RW (VR) playback.  
*8 Must be compatible with DVD+RW playback.  
*9 Must be compatible with DVD-RAM playback.  
*10 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video  
Mode Off (page 115).  
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo  
Licensing Corporation.  
8
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this  
product. DVD-Audio content will not play.  
Using DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs  
DVD-R DL (Dual-Layer) and DVD+R DL  
(Double-Layer) discs contain two recordable  
layers on a single side, giving about  
1.8 times the recording capacity of a  
conventional single-layer disc. This unit can  
record to both DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL  
discs.  
For more detailed information on the  
DualDisc specification, please refer to the  
disc manufacturer or disc retailer.  
Other disc compatibility  
In addition to DVD, this recorder is  
compatible with a wide range of disc types  
(media) and formats. Playable discs will  
generally feature one of the logos on the disc  
and/or disc packaging shown below. Note  
however that some disc types, such as  
recordable CD (and DVD), may be in an  
unplayable format — see below for further  
compatibility information.  
• If you intend to play DVD-R DL (Video  
mode) or DVD+R DL discs recorded on  
this unit on other DVD recorders/players,  
you must finalize them. (Note that some  
DVD recorders/players may not play  
even finalized DL discs.)  
• This logo indicates that the disc is a  
DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc:  
Audio CD  
CD-R  
CD-RW  
Correct operation has been confirmed for DL  
discs:  
Super Video CD (Super VCD)  
Video CD  
• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0/2x to 4x  
Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)  
• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0/2x to 8x  
Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)  
That’s  
JVC  
CD-R/-RW compatibility  
This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW  
discs.  
• Readable formats: CD audio, Video CD/  
Super VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM*  
containing MP3, WMA, JPEG or DivX  
files  
* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD  
physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1.  
Romeo and Joliet file systems are both  
compatible with this recorder.  
• DVD+R DL 2.4x  
Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)  
RICOH  
• DVD+R DL 2.4x to 8x  
Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)  
RICOH  
About DualDisc playback  
A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side  
of which contains DVD content – video,  
audio, etc. – while the other side contains  
non-DVD content such as digital audio  
material.  
• Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD  
audio and Video CD/Super VCD)  
• Unfinalized disc playback: CD audio only  
Compressed audio compatibility  
• Compatible media: DVD-ROM,  
DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, DVD-RAM,  
CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, USB  
The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not  
compliant with the CD audio specification  
and therefore may not play.  
• Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio  
Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media Audio  
(WMA)  
It is possible that when loading or ejecting a  
DualDisc, the opposite side to that being  
played will be scratched. Scratched discs  
may not be playable.  
9
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
• Sampling rates: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or  
48 kHz  
DivX video compatibility  
• Bit-rates: Any (128 kbps or higher  
recommended)  
• Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback:  
Yes  
DivX is a compressed digital video format  
created by the DivX video codec from DivX,  
• VBR WMA playback: No  
®
• WMA encoder compatibility: Windows  
Media Codec 8 (files encoded using  
Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable  
but some parts of the specification are not  
supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless,  
Voice and VBR)  
Inc. Keeping the same terminology as  
DVD-Video, individual DivX video files are  
called “Titles”. When naming files/titles on a  
disc prior to burning, keep in mind that by  
default they will be played in alphabetical  
order.  
1
• DRM (Digital Rights Management) file  
playback: No  
®
• Official DivX Certified product.  
®
• Plays all versions of DivX video  
• File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must  
be used for the recorder to recognize  
MP3 and WMA files – do not use for  
other file types)  
®
(including DivX 6) with standard  
®
playback of DivX media files.  
• File extensions: .avi and .divx (these  
must be used for the recorder to  
recognize DivX video files). Note that all  
files with the .avi extension are recognized  
as MPEG4, but not all of these are  
necessarily DivX video files and therefore  
may not be playable on this recorder.  
• File structure: The recorder can load up  
to 99 folders/999 files at one time (if there  
are more files/folders that this on the disc  
then more can be reloaded)  
WMA (Windows Media™ Audio)  
content  
This recorder can playback Windows Media  
Audio content.  
• File structure: Up to 99 folders or  
999 files.  
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are  
trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under  
license.  
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media  
Audio and refers to an audio compression  
technology developed by Microsoft  
Corporation.  
®
DivX VOD content  
DivX  
Windows Media is a trademark of Microsoft  
Corporation.  
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand)  
content on this recorder, you first need to  
register the recorder with your DivX VOD  
content provider. You do this by generating a  
DivX VOD registration code, which you  
submit to your provider.  
This product includes technology owned by  
Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or  
distributed without a license from Microsoft  
Licensing, Inc.  
Note  
1 DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by  
restricting playback, etc. of compressed audio files on devices other than the PC (or other recording equipment)  
used to record it. For detailed information, please see the instruction manuals or help files that came with your  
PC and/or software.  
10  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
Some DivX VOD content may only be  
playable a fixed number of times. When you  
load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD  
content, the remaining number of plays is  
shown on-screen and you then have the  
option of playing the disc (thereby using up  
one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If  
you load a disc that contains expired DivX  
VOD content (for example, content that has  
zero remaining plays), the message Rental  
Expired is displayed.  
PC-created disc compatibility  
Discs recorded using a personal computer  
may not be playable in this unit due to the  
setting of the application software used to  
create the disc. In these particular  
instances, check with the software publisher  
for more detailed information.  
Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF  
format) are not compatible with this  
recorder.  
Check the DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW  
software disc boxes for additional  
compatibility information.  
If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited  
number of plays, then you may load the disc  
into your recorder and play the content as  
often as you like, and no message will be  
displayed.  
Dolby Digital  
Important  
• DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM  
system. This restricts playback of  
content to specific, registered devices.  
• If you load a disc that contains DivX VOD  
content not authorized for this recorder,  
the message Authorization Error is  
displayed and the content will not play.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby  
Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D  
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
• Resetting the recorder (as described in  
Resetting the recorder on page 136) will  
not cause you to lose your registration  
code.  
DTS  
JPEG file compatibility  
• Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and  
EXIF 2.2* still image files  
*File format used by digital still cameras  
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered  
trademarks of DTS, Inc.  
• Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0  
• Horizontal resolution: 160 to 5120 pixels  
• Vertical resolution: 120 to 3840 pixels  
• Progressive JPEG compatible: No  
• File extensions: .jpg, .jpeg, .jpe, .jif, .jfif  
(must be used for the recorder to  
recognize JPEG files – do not use for  
other file types)  
• File structure: The recorder can load up  
to 99 folders/999 files at one time (if there  
are more files/folders that this on the disc  
then more can be reloaded)  
11  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
• The HDD is very delicate. If used over  
time in an improper manner or in an  
unsuitable environment, it is possible  
that the HDD will fail. Signs of problems  
include playback unexpectedly freezing  
and noticeable block noise (mosaic) in  
the picture. However, sometimes there  
will be no warning signs of HDD failure.  
If the HDD fails, no playback of recorded  
material will be possible. In this case it  
will be necessary to replace the HDD  
unit.  
About the internal hard disk  
drive  
The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile  
piece of equipment. When used without the  
proper care or in the wrong conditions, it is  
possible that recorded contents may be  
damaged or lost entirely, in some cases  
making even normal playback or recording  
impossible. Please understand that in the  
event of repair or replacement of the HDD or  
related components, all your HDD  
recordings will be lost.  
Optimizing HDD performance  
As you record and edit material on the HDD,  
the data on the disk becomes fragmented,  
eventually affecting the recorder’s  
performance. Before this happens, the  
recorder will warn you that it is time to  
optimize the HDD (which you can do from  
the Disc Setup menu; see Optimize HDD on  
page 103).  
Please use the recorder following the  
guidelines below to protect against possible  
HDD failure.  
The HDD should not be regarded as a place to  
store recordings permanently. We  
recommend that you back up your important  
recordings onto DVD discs in order to protect  
against accidental loss.  
Pioneer cannot under any circumstances  
accept responsibility for any direct or indirect  
loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of  
recorded material resulting from HDD failure.  
• Install and use the recorder on a stable,  
level surface.  
• Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan.  
• Do not use the recorder in excessively  
hot or humid places, or in places that  
may be subject to sudden changes in  
temperature. Sudden changes in  
temperature can cause condensation to  
form inside the recorder. This can be a  
cause of HDD failure.  
• Do not move the recorder immediately  
after switching it off. If you need to move  
the recorder, please follow the steps  
below:  
1 After the message POWER OFF is  
shown on the front panel display, wait at  
least two minutes.  
2 Unplug from the wall socket.  
3 Move the recorder.  
• If there’s a power failure while the  
recorder is on there is a chance that  
some data on the HDD will be lost.  
12  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
Symbols used in this manual  
The following icons are provided to help you  
quickly identify which instructions you need  
for which kind of disc.  
HDD  
HDD  
DVD  
Any type of DVD disc  
(recordable or playback  
only), finalized or not.  
DVD-Video  
Commercially produced  
DVD, finalized Video mode  
DVD-R/-RW.  
DVD (Video)  
Video mode DVD-R/-RW  
(unfinalized)  
DVD (VR)  
VR mode DVD-R/-RW  
DVD+R  
DVD+R  
DVD+RW  
DVD+RW  
DVD-RAM  
DVD-RAM  
CD  
Audio CD  
Video CD  
Video CD  
Super VCD  
Super VCD  
WMA/MP3  
WMA or MP3 files  
DivX  
DivX files  
ALL  
All of the above  
13  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
02  
CChoaptnern2 ections  
Rear panel connections  
1
2
3
4
5
ANTENNA  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
PB  
Y
PR  
IN  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
OUTPUT 2  
S-VIDEO  
INPUT 3  
S-VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
R
L
AC IN  
CONTROL  
IN  
COAXIAL  
HDMI OUT  
OUT  
R
AUDIO  
L
VIDEO  
INPUT 1/AUTO START REC  
OUTPUT 1  
6
7
8
9
10  
1
ANTENNA IN (RF IN)/OUT  
7
OUTPUT 1  
Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA  
IN (RF IN) jack. The signal is passed through  
to the ANTENNA OUT jack for connection to  
your TV.  
Stereo analog audio, video and S-Video  
outputs for connection to a TV or AV  
amplifier/receiver.  
8
OUTPUT 2  
2
INPUT 3  
Stereo analog audio, video and S-Video  
outputs for connection to a TV or AV  
amplifier/receiver.  
Stereo analog audio, video and S-Video  
inputs for connection to a satellite receiver,  
set top box, etc.  
9
CONTROL IN  
3
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
Use to control this recorder from the remote  
sensor of another Pioneer component with a  
CONTROL OUT terminal and bearing the  
Pioneer mark. Connect the CONTROL  
OUT of the other component to the  
CONTROL IN of this recorder using a mini-  
plug cord.  
A high-quality video output for connecting to  
a TV or monitor with a component video  
input.  
4
HDMI OUT  
HDMI output for high quality digital audio  
and video.  
10 AC IN – Power inlet  
5
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL)  
Connect to a power outlet using the supplied  
power cable after making all other  
connections.  
Coaxial digital audio jack for connecting to  
an AV amplifier/receiver, Dolby Digital/DTS  
decoder or other equipment with a digital  
input.  
6
INPUT 1/AUTO START REC  
Stereo analog audio, video and S-Video  
inputs for connection to a satellite receiver,  
set top box, etc.  
14  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
02  
Front panel connections  
On the front panel there is a flip-down cover  
that hides more connections.  
Left side:  
DV IN  
USB  
11  
12  
13  
11 DV IN  
A DV input i.LINK connector, suitable for  
connecting a DV camcorder.  
12 USB port (Type B)  
USB port for connecting a PictBridge-  
compatible printer or PC.  
13 USB port (Type A)  
USB port for connecting a digital camera,  
keyboard or other USB device.  
Right side:  
INPUT  
2
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L(MONO)  
R
AUDIO  
14  
14 INPUT 2  
Audio/video input (stereo analog audio;  
composite and S-Video), especially suitable  
for camcorders, game consoles, portable  
audio, etc.  
15  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
02  
1
Connect your TV antenna/cable TV  
Easy connections  
outlet to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) jack on  
this recorder.  
The setup described here is a basic  
configuration that allows you to record TV  
programmes on both this recorder and your  
VCR. When watching recordings from this  
recorder, set your TV to input 1; switch to  
input 2 to watch a video playing in the VCR.  
2
Use an RF antenna cable (one is  
supplied) to connect the ANTENNA OUT  
jack on this recorder to the antenna input  
on your VCR.  
• If you are not connecting a VCR in the  
chain, connect this recorder directly to  
your TV and skip the next step.  
Important  
• This recorder is equipped with copy  
protection technology. Do not connect  
this recorder to your TV via a VCR (or your  
VCR via this recorder) using AV cables,  
as the picture from this recorder will not  
appear properly on your TV.  
3
Use an RF antenna cable to connect  
the antenna output on your VCR to the  
antenna input on your TV.  
4
Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO  
OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) to a set of audio/  
video inputs on your TV.  
• Before making or changing any rear  
panel connections, make sure that all  
components are switched off and  
unplugged from the wall outlet.  
Use the supplied three-pin audio/video  
cable. It is colour-coded to help you match  
them up (red/white for the right/left audio  
connections and yellow for video in/outs).  
Make sure you match up the left and right  
outputs with their corresponding inputs for  
correct stereo sound.  
1
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
ANTENNA  
IN (RF IN)  
ANTENNA  
IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
PR  
P
B
Y
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
S-VIDEO  
2
AUDIO OUT  
5
Connect your VCR to your TV (A/V  
INPUT  
3
S-VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
R
L
AC IN  
CONTROL  
IN  
HDMI OUT  
COAXIAL  
IN 2 above) using a set of audio and  
video cables.  
• See the following page if you want to use  
S-Video or component video cables for  
the video connection.  
OUT  
R
AUDIO  
L
VIDE
INPUT  
1/AUTO START REC  
OUTPUT  
1
ANTENNA  
OUT  
OUTPUT 1  
2
4
To antenna input  
From antenna  
From audio/  
video output  
VCR  
output  
5
To audio/  
video input  
3
To antenna input  
To audio/  
video input  
TV  
16  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
02  
1
Connecting using an S-Video output  
Using other types of video  
output  
S-Video carries the picture as separate  
colour and luminance (brightness) signals.  
There are two S-Video outputs for  
connection to TVs, monitors, VCRs or other  
equipment.  
This recorder has standard (composite),  
S-Video and component video outputs. The  
main difference between them is the quality  
of the picture. S-Video delivers a better  
picture than composite video, while  
component video gives better picture quality  
still. The variety of outputs also gives you the  
flexibility of connecting your particular  
equipment using the best connection type  
available.  
Use an S-Video cable (not supplied) to  
connect an S-VIDEO OUTPUT (1 or 2) to  
an S-Video input on your TV, monitor (or  
other equipment).  
2
Connecting using the component  
video output.  
Component video carries the picture as two  
separate colour signals, plus a luminance  
(brightness) signal.  
To component  
video input  
To S-Video  
input  
See also Component Video Out on page 110  
for how to set up the component video  
output for use with a progressive scan-  
compatible TV.  
2
TV  
1
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
Use a component video cable (not  
ANTENNA  
IN  
OMPONENT IDEO OUT  
supplied) to connect the COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video  
input on your TV, monitor (or other  
equipment).  
P
R
PB  
Y
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
S-VIDEO  
2
AUDIO OUT  
INPUT  
3
S-VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
R
L
AC IN  
CONTROL  
IN  
HDMI OUT  
COAXIAL  
OUT  
R
AUDIO  
L
VIDEO  
INPUT  
1/AUTO START REC  
O
S-VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
17  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
02  
Connecting to a cable box or  
satellite receiver (1)  
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
1
ANTENNA  
IN (RF IN)  
If you are using a cable box or satellite  
ANTENNA  
IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
P
R
PB  
Y
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
S-VIDEO  
2
AUDIO OUT  
INPUT  
3
S-VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
R
L
AC IN  
CONTROL  
IN  
HDMI OUT  
COAXIAL  
receiver with only a few scrambled channels,  
OUT  
R
AUDIO  
L
VID
INPUT  
1/AUTO START REC  
1
OUTPUT  
1
follow the setup on this page . If many or all  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
OUTPUT 1  
the channels are scrambled, we recommend  
using the setup on the following page.  
INPUT 1/AUTO  
START REC  
1
Using the setup on this page you can:  
To antenna  
input  
3
• Record unscrambled channels by  
selecting them on this recorder.  
From antenna  
output  
From audio/  
• Record scrambled channels by selecting  
them on the cable box/satellite receiver  
and using the Auto Start Recording  
feature (see Automatic recording from a  
satellite tuner on page 47).  
Cable box/  
2
video output  
1
Satellite receiver  
To antenna  
input  
To audio/  
video input  
• Watch one channel while recording  
another.  
TV  
Important  
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.  
This enables you to watch and record TV  
channels.  
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’  
your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box.  
Always connect each component  
directly to your TV or AV amplifier/  
receiver.  
2
Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO  
OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to  
a set of audio/video inputs on your TV  
using a set of A/V cables (as supplied).  
This enables you to watch the output from  
this recorder.  
3
Connect the audio/video output of  
your cable box/satellite receiver to the  
INPUT 1 jacks on this recorder using a set  
of A/V cables.  
This enables you to record scrambled TV  
channels.  
Note  
1 The diagram shows standard video connections, but you can alternatively use the S-Video or component video  
connections if they’re available.  
18  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
02  
Connecting to a cable box or  
satellite receiver (2)  
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
1
From audio/  
video output  
To antenna  
input  
If many or all the channels you receive by  
cable or satellite are scrambled, we  
1
recommend using this setup.  
From antenna  
output  
Cable box/  
Using the setup on this page you can:  
Satellite receiver  
3
• Record any channel by selecting it on  
the cable box/satellite receiver.  
ANTENNA  
IN (RF IN)  
INPUT 1/AUTO  
START REC  
• Record using the Auto Start Recording  
feature (see Automatic recording from a  
satellite tuner on page 47).  
ANTENNA  
IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
P
R
PB  
Y
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
OUTPUT  
S-VIDEO  
2
S-VIDEO  
DIO  
V
L
AC IN  
CONTROL  
IN  
HDMI OUT  
COAXIAL  
OUT  
R
AUDIO  
L
VIDEO  
INPUT  
1/AUTO START REC  
OUTPUT  
1
ANTENNA  
OUT  
OUTPUT 1  
Important  
2
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’  
your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box.  
Always connect each component  
directly to your TV or AV amplifier/  
receiver.  
1
To audio/  
video input  
To antenna  
input  
TV  
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.  
This enables you to watch and record TV  
channels.  
2
Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO  
OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to  
a set of audio/video inputs on your TV  
using a set of A/V cables (as supplied).  
This enables you to watch discs.  
3
Connect the audio/video output of  
your cable box/satellite receiver to the  
INPUT 1 jacks on this recorder using a set  
of A/V cables.  
This enables you to record scrambled TV  
channels.  
Note  
1 • The setup on this page does not allow you to watch one channel and record another.  
• The diagram shows standard video connections, but you can alternatively use the S-Video or component video  
connections if they’re available.  
19  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
02  
Connecting to an AV  
amplifier or receiver  
Antenna/cable TV  
wall outlet  
1
ANTENNA  
IN (RF IN)  
To enjoy multichannel surround sound you  
need to connect this recorder to an AV  
amplifier/receiver using the digital coaxial  
output. In addition to the digital connection,  
we recommend also connecting using the  
stereo analog connection.  
ANTENNA  
IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
P
R
PB  
Y
DIGITAL  
OUTPUT  
S-VIDEO  
2
AUDIO OUT  
INPUT  
3
S-VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
R
L
AC IN  
CONTROL  
IN  
HDMI OUT  
COAXIAL  
OUT  
R
AUDIO  
L
VIDE
INPUT  
1/AUTO START REC  
OUTPUT  
1
ANTENNA  
OUT  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
OUTPUT 1  
2
To digital  
3
To audio/video input  
input  
You’ll probably also want to connect a video  
output to your AV amplifier/receiver. Use the  
standard (composite) video output (as  
shown here), or the S-Video or component  
video connections.  
1
From video  
output  
AV amplifier/receiver  
4
To antenna  
input  
To video  
input  
See also Audio Out on page 111 for how to  
set up the digital audio output. (Noise may  
be output from your speakers if the recorder  
is not set up to work with your AV amplifier/  
receiver.)  
TV  
1
Connect RF antenna cables as shown.  
Important  
This enables you to watch and record TV  
channels.  
• Do not connect this recorder to your TV  
‘through’ your VCR or other component  
using A/V cables. Always connect it  
directly to your TV.  
2
Connect the AUDIO and VIDEO  
OUTPUT jacks (1 or 2) on this recorder to  
a set of audio/video inputs on your AV  
amplifier/receiver.  
3
Use an coaxial digital audio cable (not  
supplied) to connect the DIGITAL AUDIO  
OUT (COAXIAL) jack on this recorder to  
an coaxial digital input on your AV  
amplifier/receiver.  
This enables you to listen to multichannel  
1
surround sound.  
4
Connect the AV amplifier/receiver’s  
video output to a video input on your TV.  
Note  
1 If your AV amplifier/receiver doesn’t have an coaxial digital input, but has a optical type, converter boxes that  
convert from coaxial to optical are available at specialist audio dealers.  
20  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
02  
page 116 for more information. Note that the  
HDMI settings remain in effect until you  
change them, or connect a new HDMI  
component.  
Connecting using HDMI  
1
If you have an HDMI or DVI-equipped  
2
monitor or display , you can connect it to  
3
this recorder using an HDMI cable (not  
supplied).  
Important  
The HDMI connector outputs uncompressed  
digital video, as well as almost every kind of  
digital audio.  
• An HDMI connection can only be made  
with DVI-equipped components  
compatible with both DVI and  
High-bandwidth Digital Content  
1
Use an HDMI cable to connect the  
Protection (HDCP). If you choose to  
connect to a DVI connector, you will  
need a DVI to HDMI adaptor cable. A DVI  
to HDCP connection, however, does not  
support audio. Consult your local audio  
dealer for more information.  
HDMI OUT connector on this recorder to  
an HDMI connector on an HDMI-  
compatible display.  
To HDMI  
input  
• The HDMI connection is compatible with  
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz, 16 bit/  
20 bit/24 bit 2-channel linear PCM  
signals, as well as Dolby Digital, DTS and  
MPEG audio bitstream.  
HDMI-compatible display  
HDMI  
OUT  
• If your connected component is only  
compatible with Linear PCM, the signal  
is output as Linear PCM (DTS audio is  
not output).  
ANTENNA  
IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
PR  
PB  
Y
ITAL  
OUTPUT  
2
UDIO OUT  
INPUT  
3
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
R
L
C IN  
CONTROL  
IN  
HDMI OUT  
OUT  
R
AUDIO  
L
VIDEO  
INPUT  
1/AUTO START REC  
OUTPUT  
1
• If you have connected to a Pioneer  
plasma display, please select the HDMI  
setup on the display (refer to the  
supplied manual for more on this).  
• The arrow on the cable connector body  
should be face down for correct  
alignment with the connector on the  
recorder.  
About HDMI  
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia  
Interface) supports both video and audio on  
a single digital connection for use with DVD  
players and recorders, DTV, set-top boxes,  
and other AV devices. HDMI was developed  
to provide the technologies of  
When connected to an HDMI component or  
HDCP-compatible DVI component, the  
HDMI indicator lights.  
HDMI setup is generally automatic. There  
are however settings you can change if you  
need to. See HDMI Output (only available  
when an HDMI device is connected) on  
High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection  
(HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface  
(DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to  
protect digital content transmitted and  
received by DVI-compliant displays.  
Note  
1 Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal  
transfers.  
2 The pixel resolution of this recorder’s HDMI video output is (according to TV format): NTSC (720 x 480i/p,  
1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) and PAL (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p). If your display is not compatible  
with these resolutions the picture may not be correctly reproduced.  
21  
En  
3 We recommend you use an HDMI cable that supports HDMI category 2.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
02  
HDMI has the capability to support  
connected plasma television, you can have  
this unit’s language settings automatically  
change to those of the plasma television  
(language information can be received only  
when no media is being played back and no  
recordings are taking place, or when you  
choose not to display this unit’s GUI  
displays).  
standard, enhanced, or high-definition video  
plus standard to multi-channel surround-  
sound audio. HDMI features include  
uncompressed digital video, a bandwidth of  
up to five gigabits per second (Dual Link),  
one connector (instead of several cables and  
connectors), and communication between  
the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.  
Important  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition  
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.  
• Depending on the type of plasma  
television, some HDMI input terminals  
do not support the HDMI Control  
function. For details, see the operating  
instructions supplied with your plasma  
television.  
HDMI Control  
By connecting this unit to an HDMI Control-  
compatible Pioneer plasma television, AV  
system (amplifier or AV receiver etc.) with an  
HDMI cable, you can control this unit from  
the remote control of a connected plasma  
television, as well as have the connected  
plasma television automatically change  
inputs in response to this unit starting  
playback.  
• To use the following functions, set this  
unit’s HDMI Control to Off (page 117).  
– When you use Auto Start Recording  
(page 47).  
– When you want this unit to  
automatically switch off upon  
completion of timer recording. (When  
HDMI Control is set to On, this unit  
does not automatically switch off if your  
plasma television is switched on upon  
completion of timer recording.)  
Refer to the operating instructions for your  
plasma television or AV system for more  
information about which operations can be  
carried out by connecting via HDMI cable.  
– When using the Video Control function  
of an external component.  
Auto-select function  
You can have a connected plasma television  
or AV system automatically change inputs  
when playback begins on this unit (including  
when you have a GUI (such as Disc  
Navigator) set to display on this unit).  
Certain connected plasma televisions may  
have their power turned from off to on when  
using this function.  
– Child lock settings (page 45).  
• HDMI Control may not operate properly  
if you do not use an HDMI cable that  
supports the HDMI 1.3 Specification.  
• Controls may not function properly in  
certain situations, such as immediately  
after you have connect an HDMI cable,  
turn this unit’s power off or remove the  
power cable for this unit or the  
connected component. If you experience  
any problems, set HDMI Control to On  
for all connected units, and then display  
the pictures stored on this unit on your  
plasma television to improve the  
situations.  
Simultaneous power function  
You can have this unit turn on automatically  
when the power for a connected plasma  
television is turned on. To have this unit’s  
power turned off when a connected plasma  
television is turned off, you must change the  
simultaneous power function of your plasma  
television.  
• We cannot guarantee this unit will work  
with HDMI Control-compatible  
components other than those made by  
Pioneer.  
Unified language function  
By receiving language information from a  
22  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
02  
Connecting a DV camcorder  
You can connect a DV camcorder or DVD  
recorder with DV output to the front panel  
DV IN jack.  
Connecting other AV sources  
Connecting a VCR or analog  
camcorder  
Important  
HDD/DVD  
OPEN/CLOSE  
• This jack is for connection to DV  
equipment only. It is not compatible with  
digital satellite receivers or D-VHS video  
decks.  
Div  
X
C
O
P
Y
HDMI  
S
T
A
NDB  
Y
/O  
N
DV IN  
USB  
INPUT  
2
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L(MONO)  
R
AUDIO  
REC  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
STOP REC  
INPUT  
SELECT  
CH  
REC MODE  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
OUTPUT  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
INPUT  
(Rear panel)  
(Front panel)  
HDD/DVD  
OPEN/CLOSE  
DivX  
C
O
PY  
HDMI  
S
T
A
NDB  
Y
/O  
N
DV IN  
USB  
INPUT  
2
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L(MONO)  
R
AUDIO  
REC  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
STOP REC  
INPUT  
SELECT  
CH  
REC MODE  
DV  
IN  
1
2
To audio/  
video input  
From audio/  
video output  
Analog camcorder  
From DV output  
DV camcorder  
VCR  
Use a DV cable (not supplied) to  
connect the DV jack of your DV  
1
Connect a set of audio and video  
camcorder to the front panel DV IN  
jack of this recorder.  
inputs of your VCR or camcorder to a set  
of outputs on this recorder.  
This enables you to record from this recorder  
to your VCR or camcorder.  
Connecting a USB device  
• You can use standard video or S-Video  
cables for the video connection.  
Using the USB ports on the front of the  
recorder you can connect USB devices such  
as digital cameras, printers, keyboards and  
PCs. Please also see the instructions that  
came with the device you want to connect  
before using.  
2
Connect a set of audio and video  
outputs of your VCR or camcorder to a  
set of inputs on this recorder.  
This enables you to record tapes from your  
VCR or camcorder.  
HDD/DVD  
OPEN/CLOSE  
D
iv  
X
C
O
P
Y
HDMI  
• You can use standard video or S-Video  
cables for the video connection.  
S
T
A
N
D
B
Y
/
O
N
D
V
I
N
USB  
INPUT  
2
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L(MONO)  
R
AUDIO  
REC  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
STOP REC  
INPUT  
SELECT  
CH  
REC MODE  
USB  
(Type B)  
USB  
(Type A)  
• The front panel connections make  
convenient connections for a camcorder  
input.  
USB  
USB  
• When connecting an external AV source  
that only supports monaural sound, only  
insert the left (white) audio jack to this  
device. Doing so will allow the same  
sound track to be recorded to both  
channels. You must connect to the  
INPUT 2 jack on the front panel.  
Digital Camera  
PictBridge-compatible  
Printer  
Keyboard  
PC  
23  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
02  
• In the event of unreliable operation with  
the hub, we recommend plugging the  
device directly into the recorder’s USB  
port.  
Important  
• Some USB devices may not work with  
this recorder.  
• Operation may become unreliable if too  
many devices are connected to the hub.  
In this case, try unplugging some  
devices.  
• When connecting a PC to this unit, make  
sure the power is turned off on both the  
PC and this unit when you connect them  
via USB.  
• If the power delivered through a hub is  
insufficient for the devices connected,  
communication can become unreliable.  
In this case, disconnect one or more  
devices then perform a USB restart. (See  
Restart USB Device on page 118.)  
• We recommend connecting USB  
devices when this recorder is switched  
off (in standby).  
JPEG file storage devices  
• Digital still camera  
• Memory card reader (any type of memory  
card)  
Using a USB printer  
• Use a PictBridge-compatible printer.  
• USB memory  
The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device  
should be FAT-compatible. Note that if the  
device is partitioned, this recorder may not  
recognize it.  
Using a USB keyboard  
• Do not use a PS/2 keyboard connected  
using a PS/2-USB adapter.  
Using a PC  
The Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP) can be  
used to transfer up to a maximum of 4000  
files.  
• Note that you can connect a PC to this  
device via USB to copy WMA and MP3  
files. For more information, see Connect  
PC on page 88. To use Connect PC with  
this device, your PC must run either the  
Windows XP Home Edition (SP2),  
Windows XP Professional (SP2) or  
Windows Vista Home Premium  
operating system and be able to run  
Windows Media Player 11. Even if your  
PC can run Windows Media Player 11,  
we cannot guarantee that it will function  
properly with this device. For more  
details see the ‘Help’ section of Windows  
Media Player 11.  
WMA/MP3 file storage devices  
• Memory card reader (any type of memory  
card)  
• USB memory  
• PC (Use Connect PC function)  
The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device  
should be FAT-compatible. Note that if the  
device is partitioned, this recorder may not  
recognize it.  
Note that although multi-slot card readers  
can be used, the recorder will only recognize  
the first card inserted. To read another card,  
remove all the cards and insert the card to be  
read again.  
Plugging in  
After checking all the connections, plug in  
the recorder.  
Using a USB hub  
• Use a hub compatible with USB 1.1 and/  
or 2.0.  
Use the supplied power cable to  
connect this recorder to a power outlet.  
• Use an independently powered hub (bus  
powered hubs may not work reliably).  
24  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
Chapter 3  
Controls and displays  
Front panel  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
HDD/DVD  
OPEN/CLOSE  
DivX  
COPY  
HDMI  
STANDBY/ON  
DV IN  
USB  
INPUT  
2
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L(MONO)  
R
AUDIO  
REC  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
STOP REC  
INPUT  
SELECT  
CH  
REC MODE  
9
10  
DivX indicator  
11  
10  
12  
1
11   
Lights when this recorder plays DivX video  
files.  
Press to start or restart playback.  
2
HDD/DVD  
Press to stop playback.  
Press to switch between HDD and DVD for  
recording and playback.  
F STOP REC  
Press to stop recording.  
3
COPY indicator  
ONE TOUCH COPY  
Lights when copying is underway.  
Press to start One Touch Copy of the  
currently playing title to DVD or the HDD.  
4
5
Disc tray  
HDD/DVD indicator  
CH +/–  
Indicator lights blue when the hard disk  
(HDD) is selected; orange when the DVD  
drive is selected.  
Use to change channels, skip chapters/  
tracks, etc.  
6
OPEN/CLOSE  
Press to open/close the disc tray.  
HDMI indicator  
INPUT SELECT  
Press to change the input used for  
recording.  
7
Lights when this recorder is connected to  
HDMI (HDCP) compatible component.  
REC MODE  
Press repeatedly to cycle through  
recording modes (picture quality).  
8
Front panel display and IR remote  
sensor  
12 REC  
See Display on page 26 for details.  
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to  
set the recording time in 30 minute blocks.  
9
STANDBY/ON  
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.  
10 Front panel inputs  
See Front panel connections on page 15 for  
more information on these.  
25  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
Display  
03  
1
2
3
4
5
6
PM  
L
R
P
10  
9
8
7
1
6
Recording quality indicators (page 36)  
Lights during playback; blinks when  
playback is paused.  
XP  
Lights when the recording mode is set to  
2
XP (best quality).  
Lights when copying.  
SP  
3
Lights when the recording mode is set to  
Lights during recording; blinks when  
recording is paused.  
SP (standard play).  
LP/SLP  
4
PM  
Lights when the recording mode is set to  
LP (long play) or SLP (super-long play).  
Lights to indicate PM (after midday) for the  
clock display.  
EP/SEP  
Lights when the recording mode is set to  
EP (extended play) or SEP (super-  
extended play).  
5
(page 38)  
Lights when a timer recording has been  
set. (Indicator blinks if the timer has been  
set to DVD but there isn’t a recordable  
disc loaded, or the timer has been set to  
HDD but the HDD is not recordable.)  
MN  
Lights when the recording mode is set to  
MN (manual recording level) mode.  
NTSC  
7
8
Character display  
Lights when the video output signal  
format is NTSC.  
R/RW  
Indicates the type of recordable DVD loaded:  
DVD-R or DVD-RW.  
(page 111)  
9
AUTO  
Taiwan and Philippines model:  
Indicates which channels are recorded  
when dual mono is selected.  
Lights when Auto Start Recording has been  
set, and during Auto Start Recording.  
10 PL (page 68)  
Other:  
Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded  
and the recorder is in Play List mode.  
Indicates which channels of a bilingual  
broadcast are recorded.  
2 3 (page 118)  
Shows theremote control mode (if nothing  
is displayed, the remote control mode is 1).  
(page 110)  
Lights when the component video output  
is set to progressive scan (except in  
some cases when a component is  
connected using HDMI).  
SAP (page 35) (Taiwan and Philippines  
model only)  
V
Lights when an unfinalized Video mode  
disc is loaded.  
Lights when the currently selected TV  
channel has a Secondary Audio  
Programme channel.  
26  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
Remote control  
03  
6
DVD  
Press to select the DVD for recording or  
playback.  
7
INPUT SELECT (page 46)  
1
2
4
STANDBY/ON ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
OPEN/CLOSE  
Press to change the input to use for  
recording.  
3
5
HDD  
DVD  
INPUT  
SELECT  
6
7
ABC  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
8
Alphanumeric buttons, + and CLEAR  
Use the number buttons for track/chapter/  
title selection; channel selection, and so on.  
The same buttons can also be used to enter  
names for titles, discs and so on.  
GHI  
PQRS  
JKL  
8
TUV  
CH  
9
CLEAR  
G-CODE  
+
CLEAR  
10  
11  
AUDIO  
SUBTITLE  
ANGLE  
PLAY MODE  
MENU  
Use the + button to enter non-alphanumeric  
characters and symbols.  
12  
14  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
TOP MENU  
13  
Use CLEAR to clear an entry and start again.  
ENTER  
15  
16  
HOME  
MENU  
RETURN  
9
CH +/– (page 35)  
17  
19  
Press to change the channel of the built-in  
TV tuner.  
18  
HELP  
DISPLAY  
REV SCAN  
PLAY  
FWD SCAN  
10 G-Code™ (page 40)  
PAUSE STOP OK  
BACK CM SKIP  
STEP/SLOW  
20  
Press then use the number buttons to enter  
a G-Code programming number for timer  
recording.  
CASE  
SELECTION  
NEXT  
PREV  
REC  
STOP REC REC MODE TIMER REC  
TV CONTROL  
21  
22  
G-Code is a trademark of Gemstar  
Development Corporation.  
INPUT  
SELECT  
CHANNEL  
VOLUME  
The G-Code system is manufactured  
under license from Gemstar Development  
Corporation.  
HDD/DVD RECORDER  
11 DVD playback functions  
AUDIO (page 35, 61)  
1
ONE TOUCH COPY (page 79)  
Changes the audio language or channel.  
(When the recorder is stopped, press to  
change the tuner audio.)  
Press to start One Touch Copy of the  
currently playing title to DVD or the HDD.  
2
Remote control indicator  
Lights when setting up the remote control  
for use with a TV (page 132) and when  
setting the remote control mode (page 118).  
SUBTITLE (page 60)  
Press to display/change the subtitles  
included in multilingual DVD-Video  
discs.  
3
STANDBY/ON  
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.  
ANGLE (page 62)  
Press to switch camera angles on discs  
with multi-angle scenes.  
4
OPEN/CLOSE  
Press to open/close the disc tray.  
12 PLAY MODE (page 58)  
5
HDD  
Press to display the Play Mode menu (for  
features such as search, repeat and  
programme play).  
Press to select the hard disk (HDD) for  
recording or playback.  
27  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
03  
13 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 55, 68)/  
TOP MENU (page 52)  
STOP  
Press to stop playback.  
Press to display the Disc Navigator screen,  
or the top menu if a DVD-Video or finalized  
DVD-R/-RW (Video) disc is loaded.  
CM BACK (commercial back)  
Press repeatedly to skip progressively  
backward through the video playing.  
14 MENU (page 52)  
Press to display the disc menu if a DVD-  
Video disc is loaded.  
CM SKIP (commercial skip)  
Press repeatedly to skip progressively  
forward through the video playing.  
15 /// and ENTER  
Used to navigate all on-screen displays.  
Press ENTER to select the currently  
highlighted option.  
PREV NEXT  
Press to skip to the previous or next title/  
chapter/track; or to display the previous  
or next menu page.  
16 HOME MENU  
  STEP/SLOW (page 57)  
Press to display the Home Menu, from which  
you can navigate all the functions of the  
recorder.  
During playback, press to start slow-  
motion playback; while paused, press to  
show the previous or next video frame.  
17 RETURN  
Press to go back one level in the on-screen  
menu or display.  
21 Recording controls (page 37)  
REC  
Press to start recording. Press  
repeatedly to set the recording time in  
blocks of 30 mins.  
18 HELP  
Press for help on how to use the current GUI  
screen.  
F STOP REC  
Press to stop recording.  
19 DISPLAY (page 62)  
Displays/changes the on-screen information  
displays.  
REC MODE (page 36)  
Press repeatedly to change the  
recording mode (picture quality).  
20 Playback controls (page 51)  
REV SCAN FWD SCAN  
(page 57)  
Press to start reverse or forward  
scanning. Press again to change the  
speed.  
TIMER REC (page 38)  
Press to start setting a timer recording.  
22 TV CONTROL (page 132)  
After setting up, use these controls to  
control your TV.  
PLAY  
Press to start playback.  
PAUSE  
Press to pause playback or recording.  
28  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
Chapter 4  
Getting started  
Switching on and setting up  
ENTER  
4
Start the Setup Navigator.  
When you switch the recorder on for the first  
time, you can make several basic settings  
using the Setup Navigator feature. This takes  
you through setting the clock, the internal TV  
tuner and the video output.  
k
Complete this setup before you  
t
start using your recorder.  
e
Start  
P
Cancel  
p
Please use the Initial Setup if you  
want to make more detailed settings.  
If you’re using the recorder for the first time,  
we strongly recommend you use the Setup  
Navigator before starting to use the  
recorder.  
• If you don’t want to use the Setup  
Navigator, press to select Cancel,  
then press ENTER to exit the Setup  
Navigator.  
Important  
ENTER  
• Some of the Setup Navigator on-screen  
displays (OSDs) in this section vary  
slightly depending on the country or  
region of purchase.  
5
Select an option then press  
ENTER.  
Taiwan and Philippines model:  
• Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs  
shown in this manual are for the Taiwan  
and Philippines model.  
k AutoChannel Setting  
t
e
P
Antenna  
Cable  
p Do not Set  
1
Switch on your TV and set the video  
input to this recorder.  
Other:  
STANDBY/ON  
k AutoChannel Setting  
t
2
Switch on the recorder.  
e
P
AutoScan  
Do not Set  
When you switch on for the first time, your TV  
should display the Setup Navigator screen (If  
the Setup Navigator doesn’t appear, you can  
also access it from the Initial Setup menu;  
see page 108).  
• Select Do not set if you want to skip  
channel setup (because they have  
already been set up, for example).  
• You can go back to the previous screen  
in the Setup Navigator by pressing  
RETURN.  
ENTER  
3
Choose a language (then  
press ENTER).  
ENTER  
Language  
English  
Español  
Italiano  
Select your country.  
Português  
k Country Selection  
t
eCountry  
P
Singapore  
29  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
Auto-tuning channels  
Manual clock setting  
The Auto Scan option automatically scans  
and sets the channel presets.  
If no stations in your area are  
broadcasting time signals, you can set  
the clock manually.  
Tuning  
Use the / buttons to set your  
time zone.  
32/68  
Cancel  
You can set this by selecting a city or a  
time relative to GMT.  
ENTER  
1/2  
k Manual Clock Setting  
6
Select ‘Auto’ for automatic  
t
Singapore  
Time Zone  
e
Singapore  
time setting, or ‘Manual’ to set the clock  
manually.  
P
p D.S.T
Off  
k ClockSetting  
t
Press then use the / buttons to  
select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ for daylight  
saving/summer time, then press  
ENTER.  
Select On if you are currently using  
daylight saving/summer time.  
e
P
Auto  
Manual  
Auto clock setting  
Some TV channels broadcast time  
signals together with the programme.  
This recorder can use these signals to  
set the clock automatically.  
1/2  
k Manual Clock Setting  
Singapore  
Time Zone  
e
Singapore  
P
p D.S.T
Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel  
preset number that broadcasts a time  
signal, then move the cursor down to  
‘Start’ and press ENTER.  
On  
Set the date and time, then press  
ENTER to make all the settings.  
Taiwan and Philippines model: The date  
is in month/day/year format.  
k AutoClock Setting  
t
Date  
––  
––  
/
:
––  
/
––––  
e
Time  
Other: The date is in day/month/year  
format.  
–– AM  
P
p
Clock Set CH  
2
Start  
2/2  
k Manual Clock Setting  
t
Date  
e
1
/
:
01  
/
2007 MON  
The recorder takes a short while to set  
the time. After you see that it’s set, select  
Next to proceed.  
P
Time  
p
Time Zone  
12  
00 AM  
Singapore  
Singapore  
D.S.T  
On  
k AutoClock Setting  
Date  
1
/
01  
12  
/
2007 MON  
00 AM  
e
Time  
• Use the / buttons to change the  
value in the highlighted field.  
:
P
p
Clock Set CH  
2
Start  
Next  
• Use the / buttons to move from one  
field to another.  
• Press ENTER to finish setting the time.  
If the time could not be set  
automatically, press RETURN to go back  
to the previous screen and select  
Manual.  
30  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
04  
ENTER  
10  
Press to continue after reading  
ENTER  
the HDD caution.  
7
Select the TV screen type,  
‘Wide (16:9)’ or ‘Standard (4:3)’.  
k Inthe event of HDD failure, recordings may  
be lost or normal playback/recording may  
t
not be possible.  
k TVScreen Size  
t
e
As recordings might be lost in case of a HDD  
P
failure, we recommend to use the HDD only  
e
P
Wide (16:9)  
as temporary storage media.  
p
Standard (4:3)  
Please copy recordings you want to keep  
to recordable DVD.  
p Navigator  
Press ENTER to continue.  
ENTER  
8
Select whether or not your TV  
ENTER  
is compatible with progressive scan  
video.  
11  
Select ‘Finish Setup’ to exit  
the Setup Navigator, or ‘Go Back’ if you  
want to start again.  
k Progressive  
t
k Setting  
e
P
Compatible  
t
Setupis complete!  
Not Compatible  
e
p Don't Know  
Finish Setup  
Go Back  
p
ENTER  
That completes basic setup using the Setup  
Navigator.  
9
Set the HDMI output (only  
when an HDMI component is connected).  
• If there are blank channels with no  
station, you can set these to skip using  
the manual channel setting. See Manual  
CH Setting on page 109.  
k HDMI Setting  
Set to the transmission mode optimized for  
the connected device?  
e
* Under this setting, nothing may appear  
on the screen due to HDMI cables, etc.  
The mode returns to the current setting  
P
p
after 30 seconds.  
Yes  
No  
• Depending on the HDMI component you  
have connected, the above screen may  
not appear.  
• Select Yes if you want this unit to  
automatically set the optimum setting  
for the device connected to the HDMI  
terminal.  
• There are cases where nothing appears  
on the screen after the automatic setup  
due to an HDMI cable, etc. If you do not  
perform any operations in this case, this  
unit returns to the previous setting in  
30 seconds.  
• Select No if you want to make this  
setting later.  
31  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
Chapter 5  
Recording  
About DVD recording  
Max.  
chapters  
(per title)  
This recorder can record to DVD-R, DVD-RW,  
DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-R DL  
and DVD+R DL media.  
Disc type/rec.  
format  
Max. titles  
(per disc)  
DVD-R/-RW  
Video mode  
99  
99  
49  
99  
DVD-R and DVD-RW discs can be initialized  
for Video mode or VR mode recording. Each  
has its advantages, and it depends on what  
you want to do with the recording which  
mode you choose.  
999*1  
99*2  
DVD-R/-RW/-RAM  
VR mode  
DVD+R/+RW  
If you want to edit your recordings in any  
significant way, VR mode offers greater  
possibilities for cutting, copying, and  
changing the way the video is presented.  
*1  
A maximum of 999 chapters are recordable per disc.  
A maximum of 254 chapters are recordable per disc.  
*2  
Video mode is less flexible when it comes to  
editing, but it has the advantage that it is  
compatible with standard DVD players  
• This recorder cannot play or record  
unfinalized DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)  
and DVD+R discs recorded on another  
recorder. DVD+RW discs recorded on  
another recorder are playable on this  
recorder but are not recordable.  
1
(many of which won’t play VR mode discs ).  
Once a disc is initialized for a particular  
mode, all recording on that disc will be in  
that mode.  
• The maximum continuous recording  
time for one title is eight hours when  
using a DVD+R/+RW disc.  
DVD+RW discs can be initialized for +VR  
mode recording.  
DVD-RAM discs can be initialized for VR  
mode recording.  
• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW  
disc, the total number of recordable  
titles remaining may not increase.  
DVD+R discs do not require initializing.  
• Although this recorder can record PAL,  
SECAM, NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix  
multiple TV line systems on one disc. A  
disc can contain PAL and SECAM  
recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See  
also Additional information about the TV  
system settings on page 119.  
Important  
The table below shows the maximum  
number of titles recordable per disc and the  
maximum number of chapters per title:  
Note  
1 Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode discs. Check the operating  
instructions for your player for VR mode compatibility information.  
32  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
• If power to the recorder is cut (due to a  
power outage, the plug being pulled from  
the power outlet, etc.) during recording,  
editing, initializing, finalizing or other  
operation, some recorded material on the  
disc, or the disc itself, may become  
unusable. In this case, try re-initializing  
the disc (DVD-RW only), or use a new  
disc. Pioneer is not responsible for lost  
recordings, damaged discs or other  
losses in these cases.  
About HDD recording  
Recording to the internal hard disk drive  
(HDD) is very flexible; you have the full  
choice of recording quality options,  
including manual mode, and of course you  
can record, erase and re-record as many  
times as you like.  
The capacity of the hard disk drive means  
that you can store many hours of video on it,  
even using the higher quality recording  
modes.  
• Fingerprints, dirt and small scratches on  
a disc can affect playback and/or  
recording performance. Please take  
proper care of your discs.  
Important  
• The maximum number of titles/chapters  
per title that can be recorded on the  
HDD is 999 and 99 respectively. No more  
recording is possible on the HDD after  
the maximum number of titles has been  
reached.  
• Pioneer takes no responsibility for  
recording failure due to power cuts,  
defective discs, or damage to the  
recorder.  
• See also Disc/content format playback  
compatibility on page 7 for detailed disc  
compatibility information.  
• The maximum continuous recording  
time for one title is 12 hours.  
• It is possible to record both PAL and  
NTSC titles on the HDD. Before  
recording, you need to make sure that  
the Input Line System setting (page 108)  
matches the TV line system of the source  
you’re recording.  
Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL  
discs  
Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs is  
generally the same as recording to regular  
single-layer discs; however, please note the  
following points:  
HDD Video mode compatibility  
When recording to the HDD you can choose  
to record in one of two formats. Set the  
format from the HDD Recording Format  
item in the Initial Setup menu (see  
page 115).  
• When the recorder switches from the  
first layer to the second during recording  
a DVD-R DL (Video mode) disc, a new  
title is automatically started on the new  
layer.  
• Up to 99 titles can be recorded on a  
DVD-R DL (Video mode) disc. If the 99th  
title is being recorded when the layer is  
switched, recording will stop.  
Taiwan and Philippines model:  
When set to Video Mode On, high-speed  
copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video  
mode) or DVD+R/+RW is possible. When  
recording a broadcast with a Secondary  
Audio Programme (SAP) channel, set which  
channel you want to record from the Initial  
Setup menu (see Dual Mono Recording on  
page 111).  
• Up to 49 titles can be recorded on a  
DVD+R DL disc.  
• You cannot play, record additional  
material to, edit or finalize a DVD-R DL or  
DVD+R DL disc that has been recorded  
on but not yet finalized on another DVD  
recorder.  
33  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
When HDD Recording Format is set to Video  
Mode Off, high-speed copying from HDD to  
DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW  
isn’t possible. However, when SAP is  
selected as the broadcast audio channel,  
both the main and SAP channels are  
recorded and you can switch the audio on  
playback.  
The table below shows the different audio  
output possibilities:  
Audio output  
Audio  
setting  
Left (L)  
Right (R)  
L + R  
R
MONO  
STEREO  
SAP  
L + R  
L
L + R  
SAP  
Other:  
When set to Video Mode On, high-speed  
copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video  
mode) or DVD+R/+RW is possible. When  
recording a bilingual broadcast, set which  
channel you want to record from the Initial  
Setup menu (see Bilingual Recording on  
page 111).  
Other:  
If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you  
are recording to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode),  
DVD+R/+RW, or to the HDD with the HDD  
Recording Format set to Video Mode On, or  
on the LPCM setting, use the Bilingual  
Recording setting (page 111) to select the  
A/L or B/R audio channel to record before  
recording starts. In other cases, both  
When HDD Recording Format is set to Video  
Mode Off, high-speed copying from HDD to  
DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW  
isn’t possible. However, both channels of  
bilingual broadcasts are recorded and you  
can switch the audio on playback.  
channels of a bilingual broadcast will be  
recorded and you can switch on playback.  
Restrictions on video  
recording  
Recorded audio  
You cannot record copy-protected video  
using this recorder. Copy-protected video  
includes DVD-Video discs and some satellite  
broadcasts. If copy-protected material is  
encountered during a recording, recording  
will pause automatically and an error  
message will be displayed on-screen.  
In all except the LPCM mode, sound is  
recorded in two channel Dolby Digital format  
(only Dolby Digital 2.0 can be recorded; Dolby  
Digital 5.1 recording is not possible). When  
set to LPCM, sound is recorded in high  
quality, uncompressed Linear PCM format.  
Video that is ‘copy-once only’ can only be  
recorded to DVD-RAM or HDD, CPRM-  
compatible VR mode DVD-R/-RW (see  
below).  
Taiwan and Philippines model:  
If the broadcast audio has a SAP channel  
and you are recording to Video mode DVD-R/  
-RW, DVD+R/+RW, or to the HDD with the  
HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode  
On, or on the LPCM setting, use the AUDIO  
button to select the Mono, Stereo or SAP  
audio channel to record before recording  
starts. In other cases, if SAP is selected then  
both the main and SAP audio channels will  
be recorded and you can switch on playback.  
When recording a TV broadcast or through  
an external input, you can display copy  
control information on screen (see  
Displaying disc information on-screen on  
page 62).  
34  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
CPRM  
Using the built-in TV tuner  
CPRM is a copy protection/scrambling  
system developed for the recording of ‘copy  
once’ broadcast programmes. CPRM stands  
for Content Protection for Recordable Media.  
There are three different ways to select TV  
channels. Note that you can’t change the TV  
channel during playback, recording or  
during recording standby.  
This recorder is CPRM compatible, which  
means that you can record copy-once  
broadcast programmes, but you cannot then  
make a copy of those recordings. CPRM  
recordings can only be made on CPRM-  
compatible DVD-R (ver. 2.0/8x or higher) or  
DVD-RW (ver. 1.1 or higher) discs formatted  
in VR mode, DVD-RAM discs or on the HDD.  
CH  
CH +/– buttons  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
GHI  
MNO  
PQRS  
TUV  
WXYZ  
CLEAR  
CLEAR  
Number buttons  
DVD CPRM recordings can only be played  
on players that are specifically compatible  
with CPRM.  
For example, to select channel 4, press 4  
then ENTER; for channel 34, press 3, 4,  
1
ENTER.  
CH +/– buttons on the front panel  
Recording equipment and  
copyright  
Changing audio channels  
Recording equipment should be used only  
for lawful copying and you are advised to  
check carefully what is lawful copying in the  
country in which you are making a copy.  
Copying of copyright material such as films  
or music is unlawful unless permitted by a  
legal exception or consented to by the  
rightowners.  
Taiwan and Philippines model:  
Some TV programmes are broadcast with  
both a main and a Secondary Audio  
Programme (SAP). You can change the TV  
audio using the AUDIO button.  
AUDIO  
Press to change the audio type.  
This product incorporates copyright protection  
technology that is protected by method claims of  
certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property  
rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other  
rights owners. Use of this copyright protection  
technology must be authorized by Macrovision  
Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited  
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by  
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or  
disassembly is prohibited.  
The current audio channel is displayed on-  
screen.  
Mono  
SAP  
Stereo  
• If SAP is selected, but there is no SAP  
channel being broadcast, you will still  
hear the main audio channel.  
• If the sound is poor quality when set to  
Stereo, you can often improve it by  
changing to Mono.  
Note  
1 • Taiwan and Philippines model: Antenna channels are numbered 2 through 69. Cable channels are numbered  
1 through 125.  
Other: Channel presets are numbered 1 through 99.  
35  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
Note  
Note  
• When recording to the HDD with HDD  
Recording Format set to Video Mode On,  
to DVD in Video mode, or on the LPCM  
setting, only one channel of a dual mono  
broadcast is recorded. In this case,  
decide which language you want to  
record before recording by setting the  
Dual Mono Recording setting (see Dual  
Mono Recording on page 111).  
• When recording to the HDD with HDD  
Recording Format set to Video Mode On,  
to DVD in Video mode, or on the LPCM  
setting, only one channel of a bilingual  
broadcast is recorded. In this case,  
decide which language you want to  
record before recording by setting the  
Bilingual Recording setting (see  
Bilingual Recording on page 111).  
Other:  
Setting the picture quality/  
recording time  
You can change the audio channel of the  
broadcast or external input signal.  
AUDIO  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD  
Press to change the audio type.  
The current audio channel is displayed on-  
screen.  
Before starting a recording, you will usually  
want to set the picture quality/recording  
time. There are six standard settings  
available, which allow you to choose a  
balance between picture quality and  
recording time.  
• If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM  
Select on page 110) is set to NICAM and  
you are watching a NICAM broadcast,  
you can switch between NICAM and  
Regular (non-NICAM) audio.  
When Manual Recording is set to On (see  
Manual Recording on page 114), a further  
option will be available (MN1 to MN32,  
LPCM, or XP+ (a super-high quality HDD  
recording mode that features a transfer rate  
of around 15 Mbps) depending on what you  
set).  
NICAM  
Regular  
• If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you  
can also select the language.  
NICAM A  
Regular  
NICAM B  
When recording to DVD, MN32 is the  
highest recording quality available. If you  
select XP+, the recording mode will  
automatically revert to MN32.  
NICAM A+B  
• You can also select the language for a  
non-NICAM bilingual broadcast.  
When recording to DVD+R/+RW, SLP is the  
longest recording time available. If you  
select SEP or MN1 to MN3, the recording  
mode will automatically revert to SLP.  
A (L)  
B (R)  
A + B (L+R)  
• When watching a recording made from  
an external input with Bilingual  
recording selected (see External Audio  
on page 110), you can switch the audio  
channel between left (L), right (R) or both  
(L+R).  
REC MODE  
Press repeatedly to select the  
recording quality.  
XP – High quality setting, gives about  
one hour of recording time on a DVD  
disc.  
SP (Standard Play) – Default quality,  
used for most applications, gives about  
two hours of recording time on a DVD.  
L
R
L+R  
36  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
LP (Long Play) – Lower video quality than  
SP, but doubles the recording time on a  
DVD to about four hours.  
• If you want to record a VR mode DVD-R  
or a Video mode DVD-RW, you must  
initialize it before proceeding (see  
Initializing recordable DVD discs on  
page 49).  
EP (Extended Play) – Lower quality than  
LP, but gives about six hours of  
recording time on a DVD disc.  
CH  
SLP (Super Long Play) – Lower quality  
than EP, but gives about eight hours of  
recording time on a DVD disc.  
2
Select a TV channel to record.  
The front panel display shows the channel  
number:  
SEP (Super Extended Play) – Lowest  
video quality but gives about ten hours of  
recording time on a DVD disc.  
ch  
1
2
Channel number  
MN1 to MN32/LPCM /XP+ – Manual/  
Linear PCM/XP+ (available only when  
manual recording is on).  
• While the recorder is stopped, you can  
also use the number buttons on the  
remote to select the channel (e.g., for  
channel 24, press 2, 4 then ENTER).  
The setting is indicated in the front panel  
display, and shown on-screen together with  
the recording time for a blank recordable  
disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the  
approximate remaining recording time for  
that disc is also shown. (Note that if the On  
Screen Display setting (see On Screen  
Display on page 118) is Off then this  
information is not displayed.)  
• If the recorder is stopped, you can also  
use the CH +/– buttons on the front  
panel to select the channel number.  
REC MODE  
3
Set the picture quality/recording  
time.  
• See Setting the picture quality/recording  
time on page 36 for detailed instructions.  
Basic recording from the TV  
AUDIO  
4
Select the audio channel to  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD  
record.  
See Changing audio channels on page 35 for  
more on this.  
Basic recording from the TV involves just  
setting the channel to record, choosing  
whether to record to the HDD or a DVD and  
selecting the recording quality.  
Taiwan and Philippines model:  
• When recording in VR mode (DVD) or  
with HDD Recording Format set to Video  
Mode Off (HDD), both mono and SAP  
audio channels are recorded, allowing  
you to switch the audio channel on  
playback. The only exception to this is  
when the picture quality is set to LPCM,  
in which case you do need to select the  
audio channel before recording.  
HDD  
DVD  
1
Select the HDD or  
DVD for recording.  
• If you’re recording to DVD, load a  
recordable disc (if you load a new blank  
DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the recorder  
takes a short while to initialize the disc).  
Note  
1 • Taiwan and Philippines model: Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality.  
When recording a broadcast with a SAP channel, select which audio channel to record (see Dual Mono  
Recording on page 111).  
Other: Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a  
bilingual broadcast, select which audio channel to record (see Bilingual Recording on page 111).  
2 Applicable only to HDD recording. (If this setting is used when recording to DVD, MN32 is used.) When copied  
to DVD, XP+ recordings are always copied in real time.  
37  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
Other:  
Setting a timer recording  
• When recording in VR mode, if a  
broadcast is bilingual, both audio  
channels are recorded, allowing you to  
switch the audio channel on playback.  
The only exception to this is when the  
picture quality is set to LPCM, in which  
case you do need to select the audio  
channel before recording.  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD  
Using the timer recording features you can  
program up to 32 timer recordings up to a  
month in advance. Timer recording  
programmes can be set to record just once,  
every day, or every week.  
There are three ways to set a timer recording;  
using the Easy Timer Recording feature (see  
Easy Timer Recording on page 39), using the  
G-Code programming system (see Timer  
recording using the G-Code™ programming  
system on page 40), or using manual timer  
recording (see Setting a manual timer  
recording on page 42).  
REC  
5
Start recording.  
If you want to set a recording end time, press  
the REC button repeatedly. The recording  
time increases in 30 minute increments, up  
to a maximum of six hours. The time the  
recording will end is shown on-screen and in  
the front panel display. When the recording  
ends, the recorder automatically switches  
into standby if no other operation is being  
performed.  
You can set the recording quality for your  
timer recording in the same way as for a  
regular recording, but with the added option  
of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the  
recording quality for the space available on  
the disc (if recording to DVD), or to fit on to a  
blank DVD disc (if recording to the HDD).  
• To cancel the set recording time, press  
REC.  
• If you want to pause recording at any  
time , press PAUSE. Press again to  
restart the recording (If recording to the  
HDD, DVD-RAM or in VR mode, a new  
chapter is started after recording  
restarts).  
1
You can set timer recordings to record to a  
recordable DVD or to the hard disk drive. For  
regular (daily or weekly) HDD timer  
recordings that you don’t need to keep, you  
can use the Auto Replace Recording feature  
to automatically replace the previous timer  
recording with the new one. Note that when  
you use this feature, the previous recording  
made on that timer programme will be  
replaced by the next one, regardless of  
whether you have watched it yet or not.  
STOP REC  
6
Press to stop recording.  
• If you set the recording time in the  
previous step, you can still stop the  
recording anytime by pressing F STOP  
REC.  
You can also set the recorder so that it will  
adjust the recording quality to try and fit the  
recording on to the disc if it would not  
otherwise fit at the recording quality you set  
(see Optimized Rec on page 114 for more on  
this).  
• Recording will stop automatically when  
there is no more space on the HDD/DVD,  
or after 12 hours of HDD recording  
(whichever is sooner).  
Finally, if you set a timer recording to record  
to DVD but there isn’t a recordable DVD  
loaded at the time of the recording, the  
Recovery Recording feature will  
automatically record the programme to the  
HDD for you.  
Note  
38  
En  
1 Except during Chase Play.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
HOME  
MENU  
Important  
1
Select ‘Timer Recording’, then  
• A timer recording can’t be set if there are  
already 32 timer programmes waiting to  
be recorded.  
‘Easy Timer’ from the Home Menu.  
PREV  
NEXT  
2
Set the TV channel to  
• Timer recording will not start if:  
– The recorder is already recording.  
– A disc is being initialized, finalized or  
unfinalized.  
record.  
Easy Timer Recording  
AM  
PM  
12:00  
8:00  
9:00  
10:00  
11:00  
1:00  
2:00  
1/01  
1/02  
1/03  
• Timer recording will start when the operation  
preventing timer recording has finished.  
• When the front panel display is set to ON,  
1/01  
MON  
9:30  
AM  
SP  
– ––:––  
the timer indicator ( ) lights in the front  
panel display when the timer is active. If  
the indicator is blinking it means that (for  
a DVD timer recording) there is no disc  
loaded, or the disc loaded is not  
recordable (for an HDD timer recording it  
means that the HDD is not recordable).  
• Approximately two minutes before a  
timer recording is set to start, the  
recorder will go into timer recording  
standby. In timer recording standby you  
cannot use some functions.  
• The maximum length for timer  
recordings made to the HDD is 24 hours.  
However, because one title (HDD) is  
limited to 12 hours, recordings over  
12 hours will be spread over two titles.  
Note that there will be a break in the  
recording of a few seconds between  
titles.  
REC MODE  
HDD/DVD  
7ch  
HDD  
REC MODE  
3
Set the recording quality.  
DVD recording: The AUTO option  
automatically sets the best recording  
quality for the space available on the disc  
loaded at the time of recording.  
HDD recording: The AUTO option  
automatically sets the best recording  
quality that would fit on to a blank DVD  
disc.  
HDD  
DVD  
4
DVD for recording.  
Select the HDD or  
5
Move the cursor to the  
recording start date and time on the grid.  
• You can move the cursor forward or back  
an hour at a time using the  
• When a scheduled recording finishes,  
this unit’s power is not turned off if the  
power for the plasma television is on. If  
you want this unit’s power to turn off  
after a timer recording finishes, set the  
HDMI Control to Off (page 117).  
REV SCAN and FWD SCAN  
buttons.  
Current time  
Recording start time  
Easy Timer Recording  
Easy Timer Recording  
AM  
8:00  
PM  
12:00  
As the name suggests, Easy Timer  
Recording makes setting up a timer  
recording as simple as possible.  
9:00  
10:00  
11:00  
1:00  
2:00  
1/01  
1/02  
1/03  
1/01  
MON  
11:45  
AM  
SP  
– ––:––  
Important  
REC MODE  
HDD/DVD  
7ch  
HDD  
• Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs  
shown in this manual are for the Taiwan  
and Philippines model.  
39  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
Each row of the grid is one day (you can set  
the timer recording for up to a month in  
advance). Each column is a 15 minute  
interval.  
Timer recording using the G-Code™  
programming system  
This system makes programming timer  
recordings very simple. Most TV guides  
publish G-Code programming numbers with  
their programme details. If you want to make  
a timer recording of a programme, you just  
input the corresponding code. The date,  
start, stop and channel settings are made  
automatically. All you have to do is tell the  
recorder the recording mode, and whether  
it’s a once-only recording or a regular  
recording.  
The darker area represents time that has  
already passed and can’t therefore be  
selected. The lighter area is time that’s  
available.  
ENTER  
6
Set the start time.  
The start date and time is displayed in the  
middle of the screen.  
• You can go back and reset the start time  
Note that if the country setting is incorrect  
(set in the Setup Navigator), timer  
recordings made using the G-Code  
programming system may not work as  
expected.  
if you need to by pressing RETURN.  
7
Move the cursor to the  
recording end time on the grid.  
Recording start time  
Recording end time  
1
Press ‘G-Code’ to display the G-Code  
programme screen.  
You can also access this screen from the  
Home Menu (press HOME MENU, select  
Timer Recording, then G-Code system).  
Easy Timer Recording  
AM  
11:00  
PM  
12:00  
1:00  
2:00  
3:00  
4:00  
5:00  
1/01  
1/02  
1/03  
G-Code#  
1/01  
MON  
11:45  
AM  
1:45  
PM  
REC MODE  
HDD/DVD  
7ch  
SP  
HDD  
1
4
7
0
2
5
8
3
6
9
As you move the cursor around the grid, an  
arrow stretches from the start time to the  
current cursor position, representing the  
length of the recording. A recording of up to  
six hours can be set.  
Cancel  
Details  
Enter  
Clear  
• Use the number buttons to enter the  
G-Code programming number. (To clear  
the last digit entered, press CLEAR.)  
ENTER  
8
Set the end time.  
• You can also use the ///  
buttons to select digits from the on-  
screen display.  
9
Select ‘Yes’ to set the timer  
recording and exit, or ‘No’ to go back to  
the Easy Timer Recording screen.  
• You can check the timer recording  
details you just set from the main timer  
recording screen (see Setting a manual  
timer recording on page 42).  
2
After making the settings, select  
‘Enter’ and press ENTER.  
The timer recording screen appears with the  
timer programme you just set.  
40  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
3
Confirm that the settings are correct.  
G-Code programming with the  
power off  
You can enter a G-Code programming  
number when the recorder is in standby.  
If the channel number isn’t displayed, use  
the / buttons to highlight CH, then use  
the / buttons to set the correct channel  
number.  
Note that the recording is always made to  
the HDD. If you want to record to a DVD disc,  
you’ll need to switch on the power and use  
the full G-Code programme screen.  
• If the channel number is set, but  
incorrectly, set up the guide channel  
(see G-Code CH Setting on page 109).  
4
Select ‘Store Programme’ to finish.  
• Other options in the same menu panel  
allow you to name the programme, and  
change the recording destination and/or  
recording mode.  
Important  
• You can’t use this feature until you have  
set up the guide channels, see G-Code  
CH Setting on page 109.  
• You can’t change the recording mode.  
Checking/editing timer recording  
settings  
You can check and/or edit the timer  
recording settings made by the G-Code  
system by selecting Details from the  
G-Code# setting screen.  
• You can’t program daily or weekly timer  
recordings.  
1
Press ‘G-Code’.  
The front panel display shows the current  
recording mode and prompts you to enter  
the G-Code programming number.  
ENTER  
1
Select ‘Details’ from the  
G-Code# setting screen.  
The Timer Programme Set screen appears,  
filled out with the timer recording details.  
2
Use the number buttons to enter the  
number.  
2
Check and edit the fields as  
necessary.  
See Setting a manual timer recording on  
page 42 for more on this.  
• To clear the last digit entered, press  
CLEAR.  
3
Press ENTER.  
ENTER  
The display shows the timer settings:  
3
Select ‘Store Programme’ to  
save the timer programme and exit.  
Date Start time End time HDD and  
Recording channel Recording mode  
• If CODE ERROR appears in the display,  
check that the number is correct and  
that the guide channel is set (see G-Code  
CH Setting on page 109), then set the  
timer recording again.  
• If CAN’T SET appears in the display, it  
means that although you entered a valid  
number, the programme has already  
finished.  
41  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
2
Select ‘New Input’ to set a new timer  
Setting a manual timer recording  
The timer recording screen you can see all  
the timer programmes already set, clear  
programmes and set up new ones.  
programme, then press ENTER.  
Timer Programme Set  
Manhattan Open Tennis  
1
Press TIMER REC to display the Timer  
CH  
10ch  
Date  
EVERYDAY  
Start  
Stop  
Extend  
30 min  
6:00PM  
7:00PM  
Recording screen.  
Store Programme  
You can also access the Timer Recording  
screen from the Home Menu (press HOME  
MENU, select Timer Recording, then Timer  
Recording).  
Detailed Settings  
Record To  
Recording Mode  
Auto Replace Rec.  
Genre  
Enter Details  
HDD  
XP  
On  
No Category  
L
Set Detailed  
Set Title Name  
Cancel  
Dual Mono Recording  
HDD Recording Format Video Mode On  
This screen shows all the timer programmes  
currently set.  
3
Enter the timer recording settings.  
Use the / buttons to select a field; use  
Timer Programme View  
3/26 SUN 3:00PM  
Tmr Pgms 3/32  
OK  
the / buttons to change the value.  
Manhattan Open Tennis  
3/26 SUN 6:00PM  
World Journey  
7:00PM  
9:00PM  
10ch  
4ch  
OK  
CH – Choose a channel (2 to 69 for  
antenna channels; 1 to 125 for cable/Pr1  
to Pr 99, excluding skip channels), or one  
of the external inputs from which to  
record.  
3/27 MON 7:30PM  
Flower  
Until 4/20  
MON  
FRI 1:30PM  
2:00PM  
8ch  
New Input  
Date – Choose a date up to one month in  
advance, or select a daily or weekly  
programme.  
HDD Remain  
DVD Remain  
59h59m(SP)  
1h59m(SP)  
• Each row is for one timer recording  
programme, with the date and time  
information, channel, recording mode,  
DVD or HDD and recording status.  
Start – Set the recording start time.  
Stop – Set the recording end time  
(maximum length of a timer recording is  
24 hours).  
• The amount of free space available on  
the HDD and the currently loaded  
recordable DVD is shown towards the  
bottom of the screen.  
Extend – Extend the end time of the  
timer recording (select Off, 30, 60, 90 or  
120 mins).  
• In the upper-right corner, the number of  
timer programmes already set is shown  
next to Tmr Pgms.  
4
If you want to change the recording  
mode, recording destination, etc., select  
‘Set Detailed’.  
In this area you can set:  
• If there are more than five timer  
programmes already set, press  
NEXT to switch page (go back using  
the PREV button).  
Record to – Select HDD for hard disk  
recording or DVD for DVD recording. Select  
HDD for Auto Replace Recording (daily or  
weekly timer recording only).  
• You can also delete a timer programme  
before it’s started (before the recorder  
enters timer recording standby) by  
highlighting it and pressing CLEAR. See  
also Deleting a timer programme on  
page 44.  
Recording Mode – Select XP, SP, LP, EP,  
SLP or SEP, (See Setting the picture quality/  
recording time on page 36). If Manual  
Recording is on, then you can also select the  
LPCM setting, XP+ or MN (press ENTER  
then use the / buttons to select the  
level).  
42  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
Auto Replace Rec. – Automatically erases  
the previous daily or weekly recording when  
the next one is recorded.  
Standby – The recorder is in timer  
recording standby.  
nothing displayed – Another timer  
recording or copying is in progress.  
Genre – Select a record genre (for HDD  
recording only).  
6
To exit the timer recording screen,  
Dual Mono/Bilingual Recording – Select  
which channel of a dual mono/bilingual  
broadcast to record (necessary if recording  
to a Video mode DVD or to the HDD with the  
HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode  
On).  
press HOME MENU.  
Tip  
• To enter a title name for the timer  
recording in advance, select Set Title  
Name and follow the on-screen display.  
HDD Recording Format – Select Video  
Mode On or Video Mode Off depending on  
whether you need high-speed copying to  
Video mode DVD capability or not.  
Note  
• If you set a DVD timer recording but  
there is no recordable DVD disc loaded,  
or the disc loaded doesn’t have enough  
free space for the complete recording,  
Recovery is shown. In this case (unless  
you load a suitable disc before the  
recording actually starts), the recorder  
will use the HDD for recording. (The  
message Can’t Rec will appear if there  
are already 999 titles on the HDD or if  
there is not enough free space on the  
HDD for recording.)  
5
After entering all the timer recording  
information, highlight ‘Store  
Programme’ and press ENTER.  
The timer recording list screen is displayed  
again. The timer programme you just input  
appears in the list. The rightmost column  
shows various timer recording status  
messages:  
OK – Can be recorded.  
Time Over – Not enough space on the  
HDD (the recording won’t finish).  
Over 12h – Recording time of over  
12 hours set (when recording to the HDD  
the recording will be split into two titles).  
• For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized  
Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 114) is  
set to On, the recorder will adjust the  
recording quality to try and fit the  
recording on the disc. If the recording  
will not fit onto the disc even on MN1  
(MN4 for DVD+R/+RW) recording  
quality then the Recovery Recording  
feature will automatically make the  
recording to the HDD instead.  
Overlap – Two timer programmes  
partially or completely overlap. The one  
starting earlier will take priority.  
Until ... (eg., Until 8/13) – For a regular  
recording, the last programme that  
could be recorded is shown.  
Data Over – Can’t record because the  
disc management area of the disc is full.  
• If there is very little free space left on the  
HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may  
not complete successfully.  
Cancel Once – A regular timer  
programme is set to skip.  
• If the HDD is being used for playback or  
high-speed copying when an Auto  
Replace Recording is due to start, the  
new timer recording will not replace the  
old one. However, the next time the timer  
recording starts, both of the older two  
programmes will be erased.  
Can’t Rec – Not possible to record.  
Title Over – Can’t record because there  
is already the maximum number of titles  
on the disc (HDD: 999; DVD: 99).  
Recording – The programme is currently  
recording.  
43  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
3
Press then select ‘Cancel Once’  
Editing a timer programme  
You can change any of the settings in a timer  
programme before the recording is due to  
start.  
from the command menu panel.  
• In the timer programme list, Cancel  
Once appears by the programme.  
• You can also just press PAUSE when  
the timer programme is highlighted.  
1
Press TIMER REC.  
2
Highlight the timer programme you  
want to change.  
Extending a timer recording in  
progress  
You can extend a timer recording beyond the  
programmed end time in two different ways.  
This can be useful if a broadcast programme  
overruns, for example.  
3
Press then select ‘Modify’ from the  
command menu panel.  
Alternatively, press ENTER.  
The Timer Programme Set screen appears  
from which you can edit the settings.  
4
Edit the timer recording settings as  
Cancelling or extending the timer  
necessary.  
REC  
5
Select ‘Store Programme’ to finish.  
1
Press and hold for three seconds  
Confirm the settings you made from the  
following screen.  
during a timer recording.  
Recording continues, but the timer indicator  
disappears from the front panel display  
indicating that the timer has been cancelled.  
Deleting a timer programme  
You can delete timer programmes you no  
longer need.  
REC  
2
Press repeatedly to extend  
1
Press TIMER REC.  
recording in 30 minute blocks.  
2
Highlight the timer programme you  
Programming a new end time  
You can edit the end time of a timer  
recording you have previously set.  
want to erase.  
3
Press then select ‘Erase’ from the  
command menu panel.  
1
Press TIMER REC.  
• Select Yes to confirm or No to cancel.  
• You can also just press CLEAR when the  
timer programme is highlighted.  
2
Highlight the timer recording  
you want to change.  
Skipping a regular timer  
programme  
ENTER  
If you’ve set a regular daily or weekly timer  
programme, you can set the recorder to skip  
the next scheduled recording.  
3
Press then select ‘Modify’  
from the command menu panel.  
Alternatively, press ENTER.  
1
Press TIMER REC.  
The Timer Programme Set screen appears,  
from which you can edit the settings.  
2
Highlight the timer programme you  
want to skip.  
ENTER  
4
Edit the end time as necessary.  
You can also edit the Extend time parameter.  
44  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
Timer recording FAQ  
Frequently Asked Questions  
ENTER  
5
6
Select ‘Store Programme’.  
HOME  
MENU  
• Even though the timer is set, the recorder  
doesn’t start recording!  
Press to exit the Timer Recording  
screen.  
Check that the disc loaded or HDD is  
recordable, not locked (see Lock Disc on  
page 102), and that there are fewer than  
99/999 titles already on the DVD/HDD.  
Stopping a timer recording  
STOP REC  
• The recorder won’t let me enter a timer  
programme! Why not?  
1
2
Press during a timer recording.  
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm.  
ENTER  
You can’t enter a timer programme if the  
clock isn’t set.  
• What happens when two or more timer  
programmes overlap?  
Preventing use of the recorder  
before a timer recording (child  
Basically, the programme with the earlier  
recording start time has priority.  
However, the recorder will start  
lock)  
You can make all the front panel and remote  
control buttons inoperative using the child  
lock feature. This is useful when you set a  
timer recording and want to make sure that  
the timer settings are not changed before  
recording has finished.  
recording the programme with the later  
start time after the earlier programme is  
finished. If schedule to record two  
programmes have the same times (but  
different channels, for example), then  
only one of the two programmes will be  
recorded. In this event you should cancel  
the scheduled recording of the lesser  
important programme. If one of the  
overlapping programmes is a regular  
timer programme, you may choose  
‘Cancel Once’ in order to avoid having it  
overlap with a separately scheduled  
programme (see Skipping a regular timer  
programme on page 44).  
STANDBY/ON  
1
If the recorder is on, switch it  
into standby.  
2
[Front panel] Press and hold for  
three seconds to lock the controls.  
The front panel display briefly shows  
LOCKED. If any buttons are pressed on the  
remote or front panel, LOCKED is briefly  
displayed again.  
• To unlock the recorder, press and hold  
(Stop) on the front panel (while the  
recorder is stopped) for three seconds  
until the display shows UNLOCKED.  
• Even if you make child lock settings, this  
unit can still be controlled by the remote  
of a connected plasma television. If you  
do not want this unit to be able to be  
controlled by another component when  
you have set a child lock, turn this unit’s  
HDMI Control to OFF (page 117).  
45  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
• During recording or in timer recording  
standby, you can’t play an HDD title,  
DVD or Video CD/Super VCD disc if the  
Input Line System setting doesn’t match  
the TV line system of the disc/HDD title  
(see also Additional information about  
the TV system settings on page 119).  
Also, during simultaneous recording  
and playback, if the TV line system of the  
playback track/title changes then  
Simultaneous recording and  
playback (Chase Play)  
HDD  
Chase Play allows you to watch a recording  
that is still in progress from the start, without  
having to wait until the recording has finished  
(i.e., playback is ‘chasing’ the recording).  
In fact, you’re not just limited to watching  
the recording in progress. You can watch  
anything else already on the HDD (or on a  
DVD if you’re recording to the HDD) by  
selecting it from the Disc Navigator screen  
(see Using the Disc Navigator with recordable  
discs and the HDD on page 55).  
playback will automatically stop.  
Recording from an external  
component  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD  
Chase Play is not possible when DV is the  
recording input.  
You can record from an external component,  
such as a camcorder or VCR, connected to  
one of the recorder’s external inputs.  
Important  
1
Make sure that the component you  
• You can’t use this feature during Auto  
Start Recording, or in Auto Start  
Recording standby (the AUTO indicator  
is lit in the front panel display).  
want to record from is connected  
properly to the HDD/DVD recorder.  
See Chapter 2 (Connecting up) for  
connection options.  
INPUT  
SELECT  
PLAY  
2
Press repeatedly to select one of  
Press during recording to  
the external inputs to record from.  
There are three analog inputs. The current  
input is shown on-screen and in the front  
panel display:  
start playback from the beginning of the  
current recording .  
1
DISC NAVIGATOR  
Press during recording to  
L1 – INPUT 1/AUTO START REC  
L2 – INPUT 2 (front panel)  
L3 – INPUT 3  
select another title to play.  
You can use all the usual playback controls,  
such as pause, slow-motion play, scan and  
skip.  
Check that the Audio In settings for  
External Audio, and Dual Mono  
Recording/Bilingual Recording are as you  
want them (see Audio In on page 110).  
• To stop playback, press STOP  
(recording will continue).  
• To stop recording, press F STOP REC  
(playback will continue).  
• If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed  
or stretched), adjust on the source  
component or your TV before recording.  
Note  
1 You can’t start playback immediately after recording starts. Simultaneous playback and recording doesn’t work  
while copying or backing up.  
46  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
• To watch video coming in via the DV  
input (front panel), select DV > DV  
Video Playback from the Home Menu  
(see also Playing from a DV camcorder on  
page 64).  
• If Auto Start Recording is set, it will not  
start if another timer recording is in  
progress.  
• Timer recordings take precedence over  
Auto Start Recording. Auto Start  
Recording will stop if a timer recording is  
due to start. After the timer recording  
has finished, Auto Start Recording will  
resume.  
REC MODE  
3
4
Set the recording quality.  
• See Setting the picture quality/recording  
time on page 36 for detailed information.  
• Turn the HDMI Control setting to Off  
when using Auto Start Recording  
(page 117).  
HDD  
DVD  
Select the HDD or  
DVD for recording.  
REC  
5
Press to start recording.  
1
Set the timer for the satellite receiver  
• If your source is copy-protected using  
Copy Guard, you will not be able to  
record it. See Restrictions on video  
recording on page 34 for more details.  
(or other component), then switch it into  
standby (if necessary).  
Check the manual that came with the  
receiver if you’re not sure how to do this.  
2
Check that the ‘Audio In’ settings for  
‘External Audio’ and ‘Dual Mono  
Recording/Bilingual Recording’ are as  
you want them.  
See Audio In on page 110 for more on these  
settings.  
Automatic recording from a  
satellite tuner  
HDD  
3
Set up the recorder.  
If you have a satellite tuner or some other  
kind of set top box connected to the INPUT  
1/AUTO START REC input, you can have the  
recorder start and stop recording  
automatically with the timer settings of the  
connected component. (If the other  
• Use REC MODE to set the recording  
quality. See Setting the picture quality/  
recording time on page 36 for detailed  
information.  
4
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Timer  
component doesn’t have a built-in timer,  
you’ll need to use it with an external timer  
unit.)  
Recording’, then ‘Auto Start Recording’.  
1
5
Select ‘Yes’ to switch Auto Start  
Recording on, or ‘No’ to switch off.  
If you choose ‘Yes’ the recorder  
automatically goes into standby.  
After setting up for Auto Start Recording, this  
recorder starts recording when it detects a  
signal from the other component. When the  
signal ceases, the recorder stops recording.  
The AUTO indicator in the front panel  
display lights.  
The recorder will automatically switch on  
and start recording when the other  
Important  
component comes on. Recording stops  
when the external component switches off.  
• It takes a little while for this recorder to  
switch on and start recording after  
detecting a signal. Please bear this in  
mind when setting the timer.  
Note  
1 You can’t set Auto Start Recording when:  
– the recorder is recording or in timer recording standby.  
– the HDD is not recordable.  
47  
En  
– the HDD already contains the maximum number of titles (999).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
• To cancel Auto Start Recording, press  
STANDBY/ON while the recorder is in  
standby. The AUTO indicator goes off.  
When you finalize a DVD-R/-RW (Video  
mode) or DVD+R disc, a title menu is  
created from which you can select titles  
when you play the disc. There are a number  
of different styles of title menu to choose  
from to suit the content of the disc.  
• To cancel Auto Start Recording once  
recording has already started, press  
REC for three seconds (this cancels  
Auto Start Recording, but recording  
continues), then F STOP REC to stop  
recording.  
All the title menus are navigated in the usual  
way, pressing MENU or TOP MENU to  
display the menu, then using the ///  
followed by ENTER to select titles and start  
playback.  
• You can also stop recording by pressing  
F STOP REC then selecting Yes to  
confirm.  
Finalizing a disc  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW  
Tip  
• Alternatively, with no OSD displayed,  
press and hold the front panel F STOP  
REC button for more than three seconds  
to switch Auto Start Recording on  
directly. After switching on, switch the  
recorder into standby.  
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings on the disc  
so that it can be played on a regular DVD  
player or computer equipped with a suitable  
1
DVD-ROM drive.  
Note that the disc name will appear in the  
title menu after you finalize a disc. Make sure  
the disc name is as you want it before you  
finalize the disc as it can’t be changed  
afterwards. If you want to rename the disc,  
see Input Disc Name on page 102 before  
starting the steps below.  
When using the Video Control function of an  
external component, set the HDMI Control  
to Off (page 117).  
Playing your recordings on  
other DVD players  
DVD+RW discs don’t generally need  
finalizing. However, if you want a title menu  
to appear when you play the disc, then you  
will need to finalize. When using a  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW  
DVD+RW, you can still record and edit even  
after finalizing. although the title menu will  
disappear if you do so. Finalize the disc  
again to generate a new title menu.  
Most regular DVD players can play finalized  
discs recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)  
and DVD+R discs. A number of players  
(including many Pioneer models) can also  
play DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode,  
finalized or not. Most players will not play VR  
mode DVD-R discs, although some  
DVD-ROM drives and DVD recorders may be  
able to (finalization might be necessary).  
Check the manual that came with the player  
to check what kinds of discs it will play.  
Important  
• Once you’ve finalized a DVD-R/-RW  
(Video mode) or DVD+R disc, you can’t  
edit or record anything else on that disc.  
However, the finalization on a DVD-RW  
disc maybe ‘undone’; see Undo Finalize  
on page 103 for how to do this.  
Note  
1 If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize  
the disc. See Additional information about the TV system settings on page 119 for how to change the recorder’s  
setting.  
48  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
• A VR mode DVD-R/-RW (excluding  
DVD-R DL) disc can still be recorded and  
edited on this recorder even after  
finalizing.  
• Discs recorded partially or fully on the  
Pioneer DVR-7000 DVD recorder do not  
support this feature. These discs will  
have only a text title menu when finalized  
on this recorder.  
• DVD-R DL (Video mode) discs and  
DVD+R DL discs must be finalized in  
order to play in other recorders/players.  
Note however that some recorders/  
players will not play even finalized dual-  
layer discs.  
5
The recorder will now start finalizing  
the disc.  
During finalization:  
• If the finalization process of a DVD-RW  
or DVD+R/+RW disc is going to take  
more than around four minutes, you can  
press ENTER to cancel. Around four  
minutes before completion, the option to  
cancel disappears.  
1
Load the disc you want to finalize.  
Make sure that the recorder is stopped  
before proceeding.  
HOME  
MENU  
• You can’t cancel the finalization of a VR  
mode DVD-R disc.  
2
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the  
Home Menu.  
• How long finalization takes depends on  
the type of disc, how much is recorded  
on the disc and the number of titles on  
the disc. A disc recorded in VR mode can  
take up to one hour to finalize. DVD-R/  
-RW (Video mode) and DVD+R/+RW  
discs can take up to 20 minutes.  
ENTER  
3
Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Finalize’ >  
‘Next Screen’.  
Disc Setup  
Next Screen  
Start  
Basic  
Finalize  
Undo Finalize  
Initialize  
Finalize  
Optimize HDD  
Initializing recordable DVD  
discs  
DVD-R DVD-RW  
DVD+RW DVD-RAM  
ENTER  
DVD-R/-RW discs can be initialized for either  
Video mode recording or VR mode  
recording.  
4
For DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)  
1
and DVD+R/+RW discs only, select a title  
menu style, then select ‘Yes’ to start  
finalization or ‘No’ to cancel.  
The menu you select will be the one that  
appears when the ‘top menu’ (or ‘menu’ for a  
DVD+R/+RW) is selected on any DVD player.  
When you first load a blank DVD-RW or  
DVD+RW disc, the recorder initializes it for  
recording automatically. By default, blank  
DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode  
recording. See DVD-RW Auto Initialize on  
page 50 if you want to change the default to  
Video mode.  
Finalize  
DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode  
recordings out of the box; if you want to use  
a DVD-R for VR mode recording, you must  
initialize it before recording anything on the  
disc.  
Note  
1 If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize it  
for Video mode recording.  
49  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
05  
DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be  
initialized in order to erase the contents of  
the disc.  
DVD-RW Auto Initialize  
DVD-RW  
Important  
• Default setting: VR Mode  
• Initializing a DVD-RW, DVD+RW or  
DVD-RAM disc will erase everything  
recorded on it. Make sure there is  
nothing on the disc that you want to  
keep!  
Initialization mode is automatically carried  
out when you insert a blank DVD-RW. You  
must set the desired initialization mode  
before inserting a disc.  
HOME  
MENU  
• You may not be able to re-initialize a  
DVD-RW disc in a different format if it  
was originally initialized on an older DVD  
recorder.  
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the  
Home Menu.  
ENTER  
• Once initialized for VR mode recording,  
you can’t re-initialize a DVD-R back to  
Video mode.  
2
Select ‘Basic’>’DVD-RW Auto  
Init.’, then ‘VR Mode’ or ‘Video Mode’.  
HOME  
MENU  
Disc Setup  
VR Mode  
Basic  
Input Disc Name  
Lock Disc  
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the  
Video Mode  
Initialize  
Finalize  
DVD-RW Auto Init.  
Home Menu.  
Optimize HDD  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Initialize’ > ‘Video  
Mode’, ‘VR Mode’ or ‘Initialize DVD+RW’.  
Disc Setup  
Start  
Start  
Start  
Basic  
VR Mode  
Initialize  
Finalize  
Video Mode  
Initialize DVD+RW  
Optimize HDD  
ENTER  
3
Select ‘Start’.  
It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the  
disc (except DVD-RAM discs, which can take  
up to an hour).  
Initializing Disc  
2ch  
1 min left  
50  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
Chapter 6  
Playback  
Introduction  
• Some DVD-Video, DVD+R and  
DVD+RW discs don’t allow certain  
playback controls to operate at certain  
points in the disc. This is not a  
malfunction.  
Most of the features described in this  
chapter make use of on-screen displays.  
Navigate these using the cursor buttons and  
ENTER. To go back one level from any  
screen, use the RETURN button.  
HDD  
DVD  
1
Select the HDD or  
DVD for playback.  
If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 3  
below.  
Remember also that the button guide at the  
bottom of every screen shows which buttons  
do what.  
Select DVD for any kind of disc playback.  
Many of the functions covered in this  
chapter apply to the HDD, DVD discs, Video  
CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3/DivX discs  
and CDs, although the exact operation of  
some varies slightly with the kind of disc  
loaded.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
2
Load a disc.  
Load a disc with the label side facing up,  
using the disc tray guide to align the disc (if  
you’re loading a double-sided DVD-Video  
disc, load it with the side you want to play  
face down).  
• Many functions are not available when a  
Video CD is playing in PBC mode. Start  
playback from the Disc Navigator screen  
for non-PBC playback (see Using the  
Disc Navigator with playback-only discs  
on page 56).  
• If you want to play a DTS Audio CD,  
please first read the note on page 53.  
PLAY  
3
Start playback.  
• For discs that contain JPEG picture files,  
see The PhotoViewer on page 94.  
• If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video  
CD, a disc menu may appear when you  
start playback. Use the ///  
buttons, number buttons, and ENTER to  
navigate DVD disc menus, and the  
number buttons and ENTER for Video  
CD menus.  
Important  
• Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs  
shown in this manual are for the Taiwan  
and Philippines model.  
• The Disc Navigator is automatically  
displayed for WMA/MP3 files and Audio  
CDs (see Using the Disc Navigator with  
playback-only discs on page 56).  
Basic playback  
ALL  
• When playing video from the HDD,  
playback will automatically stop after the  
end of a title is reached.  
This section shows you how to use your  
recorder for playback of discs (DVD, CD,  
etc.), and for playback of video from the HDD.  
• There may be a slight pause when  
playback switches from the first to the  
second layer of a dual-layer disc.  
Important  
• See the following sections for more  
details on playing specific kinds of discs.  
• Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’  
means any kind of playable or recordable  
DVD. If a function is specific to a  
particular kind of DVD disc, it is specified.  
51  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
STOP  
(Commercial back/skip) Each  
press skips backward/forward  
progressively up to a maximum  
of two hours in either direction.  
BACK CM SKIP  
4
5
Press to stop playback.  
When you’ve finished using the  
recorder, eject the disc and switch the  
recorder back into standby.  
Press to start slow-motion  
playback. Press repeatedly to  
change the playback speed.  
While paused, press to advance  
a single frame in either  
direction.  
STEP/SLOW  
Playing DVD discs  
The table below shows the basic playback  
controls for DVD-Video, and recordable DVD  
discs.  
Press to start playback.  
PLAY  
Press to display the menu of a  
DVD-Video disc. (DVD+R/+RW  
discs finalized on this recorder  
will display the Disc Navigator.  
Press MENU to display the disc  
menu.)  
MENU  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
If RESUME is displayed on-  
screen, playback starts from the  
place last stopped.  
TOP MENU  
Press to stop playback.  
You can resume playback from  
the same point by pressing  
PLAY. (Press STOP again  
to cancel the resume function.)  
STOP  
Use the cursor buttons to  
navigate DVD-Video disc  
menus; press ENTER to select  
items.  
ENTER  
Pauses playback, or restarts  
PAUSE  
playback when paused.  
RETURN  
Press to return to the previous  
level of a DVD-Video disc menu.  
Press to start scanning. Press  
REV SCAN FWD SCAN  
repeatedly to increase the  
scanning speed.  
Playing from the HDD  
The table below shows the basic playback  
controls when playing video recorded on the  
hard disk (HDD).  
Press to skip to previous/next  
PREV  
NEXT  
chapter/title. (During playback  
you can also use the front panel  
CH +/– buttons.)  
DVD+R/DVD+RW only:  
PREV may not always skip  
to the previous title.  
Press to start playback.  
PLAY  
If RESUME is displayed on-  
screen, playback starts from the  
place last stopped. Playback  
automatically stops after the  
end of a title is reached.  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
Except VR mode: During  
playback, enter a chapter  
number then press ENTER to  
skip directly to that chapter  
within the currently playing title.  
On some discs, you can also  
use the number buttons to  
select numbered items in the  
disc menu.  
GHI  
PQRS  
TUV  
Press to stop playback.  
STOP  
CLEAR  
You can resume playback from  
the same point by pressing  
PLAY. (Press STOP again  
to cancel the resume function.)  
CLEAR  
ENTER  
Pauses playback, or restarts  
PAUSE  
playback when paused.  
VR mode only: During playback,  
enter a title number then press  
ENTER.  
Press to start scanning. Press  
REV SCAN FWD SCAN  
repeatedly to increase the  
scanning speed.  
All: Press CLEAR to clear a  
number entry and start again.  
52  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
Press to skip to previous/next  
chapter/title. (During playback  
you can also use the front panel  
CH +/– buttons.)  
Press to start scanning. Press  
again to increase the scanning  
speed. (There are two scan  
speeds; the current scan speed  
is shown on-screen.)  
REV SCAN FWD SCAN  
PREV  
NEXT  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
During playback, enter a title  
number then press ENTER to  
skip directly to that title.  
GHI  
Press to skip to previous/next  
track.  
PREV  
NEXT  
PQRS  
TUV  
Press CLEAR to clear a number  
entry and start again.  
CLEAR  
CLEAR  
Playing Video CD/Super VCDs  
The table below shows the basic playback  
controls for Video CD/Super VCDs.  
ENTER  
Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC  
for short) menus. These discs show PBC in  
the display when you load them and display  
a menu on-screen from where you can select  
(Commercial back/skip) Each  
press skips backward/forward  
progressively up to a maximum  
of two hours in either direction.  
BACK CM SKIP  
2
what to watch.  
Press to start slow-motion  
playback. Press repeatedly to  
change the playback speed.  
While paused, press to advance  
a single frame in either  
direction.  
STEP/SLOW  
Press to start playback.  
PLAY  
Video CD only: If RESUME is  
displayed on-screen, playback  
starts from the place last  
stopped.  
Press to stop playback.  
STOP  
Video CD only: You can resume  
playback from the same point  
by pressing PLAY. (Press  
STOP again to cancel the  
resume function.)  
Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs  
The table below shows the basic playback  
1
controls for Audio CDs , and WMA/MP3  
files.  
Press to start playback.  
PLAY  
Pauses playback, or restarts  
PAUSE  
playback when paused.  
Press to stop playback.  
Press to start scanning. Press  
STOP  
REV SCAN FWD SCAN  
repeatedly to increase the  
scanning speed.  
Pauses playback, or restarts  
playback when paused.  
PAUSE  
Press to skip to previous/next  
track.  
PREV  
NEXT  
When a PBC menu is displayed,  
press to display the previous/  
next page. (During playback  
you can also use the front panel  
CH +/– buttons.)  
Note  
1 If you want to play a DTS Audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amplifier/receiver  
with a digital connection. Noise will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that STEREO is  
selected using the  
AUDIO button (see Switching audio channels on page 61).  
2 When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and programme play are not  
available. You can play a PBC Video CD/Super VCD in non-PBC mode by starting playback using the Disc  
Navigator (see Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on page 56).  
53  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
Playing DivX video files  
The table below shows the basic playback  
controls for DivX video files.  
ABC  
JKL  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
During playback, enter a track  
number then press ENTER to  
skip directly to that track.  
Press CLEAR to clear a number  
entry and start again.  
While a PBC menu screen is  
displayed, use to select  
numbered menu items.  
GHI  
PQRS  
TUV  
CLEAR  
Press to start playback.  
PLAY  
CLEAR  
If RESUME is displayed on-  
screen, playback starts from the  
place last stopped. Playback of  
titles (DivX files) proceeds in  
alphabetical order.  
ENTER  
(Commercial back/skip) Each  
press skips backward/forward  
progressively up to a maximum  
of two hours in either direction.  
Note that this function doesn’t  
work when playing in PBC  
mode.  
BACK CM SKIP  
Press to stop playback.  
STOP  
You can resume playback from  
the same point by pressing  
PLAY. (Press STOP again  
to cancel the resume function.)  
Pauses playback, or restarts  
playback when paused.  
PAUSE  
Press to start slow-motion  
playback. Press repeatedly to  
change the playback speed  
(forward only).  
While paused, press to advance  
a single frame (forward only).  
STEP/SLOW  
Press to start scanning. Press  
repeatedly to increase the  
scanning speed.  
REV SCAN FWD SCAN  
Press to skip to previous/next  
PREV  
NEXT  
RETURN  
Press to display the disc menu  
of a Video CD/Super VCD  
playing in PBC mode.  
title. (During playback you can  
also use the front panel CH +/–  
buttons.)  
Press to start slow motion  
playback (press repeatedly to  
change the slow motion play  
speed).  
STEP/SLOW  
While paused, press to advance  
one frame.  
AUDIO  
Press to display the playback  
audio type; press repeatedly to  
change the playback audio  
type.  
SUBTITLE  
Press to display subtitle  
information; press repeatedly to  
change subtitles.  
54  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
Changing the display style of the  
Disc Navigator  
Using the Disc Navigator with  
recordable discs and the HDD  
You can choose to display titles in the Disc  
Navigator in various different ways, sorted  
alphabetically, by recording date, by genre,  
and so on. You can also choose whether to  
display four or eight titles on the screen at  
the same time.  
DVD-R DVD-RW  
DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD  
You can use the Disc Navigator to browse  
and edit video on recordable DVDs and the  
HDD, and to view information on titles.  
See also Editing on page 67 for more on  
editing recordable discs.  
1
Display the view options  
HDD  
DVD  
panel.  
1
Select the HDD or  
DVD.  
The view options panel  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
2
Open the Disc Navigator.  
10Titles  
12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP  
Style  
4
12/03Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP
Titles  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
2h00m(1.0G)  
10Titles  
Sort order  
7
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP  
12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP  
Recent first  
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP  
MENU  
2h00m(1.0G)
4
Titles  
Genre  
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch SP  
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP  
9
8
7
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP  
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP  
All Genres  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Recent first  
All Genres  
MENU  
2h00m(1.0G)  
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch SP  
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP  
HDD  
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
1h00m(1.0G)  
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
HDD  
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
ENTER  
2
Choose ‘Style’, ‘Sort order’ or  
• You can also access the Disc Navigator  
from the Home Menu.  
‘Genre’, then press ENTER to see the  
available view options.  
Style – Select four or eight titles per  
screen view  
3
Browse the list of titles.  
• Use the PREV/NEXT buttons to  
display the previous/next page of titles.  
Sort order – Sort by date (most recent  
first), unwatched first, title name or  
recording date (oldest first)  
• To change the thumbnail picture  
displayed for a title see Set Thumbnail on  
page 72.  
Genre – Display all genres or just a  
selected genre  
• For HDD recordings, you should be able  
to see a thumbnail title digest. If it  
doesn’t display, set Set Preview to  
Normal. See Set Preview on page 118.  
ENTER  
3
Choose a view option, then  
press ENTER.  
The title list display is updated according to  
the new display preferences.  
ENTER  
4
Play the highlighted title.  
• You can also select Play from the  
command menu options.  
55  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
• Proceed to step 4 when playing back an  
Audio CD.  
Using the Disc Navigator  
with playback-only discs  
Disc Navigator (DVD/CD)  
Use the Disc Navigator to browse the  
contents of a disc and start playback.  
Track List  
10 Tracks  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Track 01  
Track 02  
Track 03  
Track 04  
Track 05  
Track 06  
Track 07  
Track 08  
CD  
MENU  
DVD-Video Video CD Super VCD  
1
2
Select DVD.  
DVD  
Track 01  
0.04.30 / 1.14.00  
Track 03  
Track Repeat  
650MB  
(None)  
0.05.30  
10.00.00  
HDD  
HOME  
MENU  
Remain  
100.0  
G
Stereo  
3
Display the Home Menu.  
ENTER  
3
Select a folder that contains  
ENTER  
3
Select ‘Disc Navigator’.  
the tracks or titles you want to play back.  
Alternatively, for a Video CD or Super VCD,  
you can press DISC NAVIGATOR, which  
takes you straight to the Disc Navigator  
screen.  
ENTER  
4
Select what you want to play.  
Playback starts after you press ENTER.  
• Use the SUBTITLE/ANGLE buttons to  
display the previous/next page of folders/  
tracks/titles.  
ENTER  
4
Select what you want to play.  
Depending on the type of disc you have  
loaded, the Disc Navigator looks slightly  
different, but they are all navigated in the  
same way.  
• You can also select Play from the  
command menu options.  
• For discs that contain CD audio tracks  
and WMA/MP3 tracks or DivX titles, you  
can switch the playback area between  
CD, WMA/MP3 and DivX. Playback  
stops if you switch the playback area  
during playback. See Changing the  
display style of the Disc Navigator on  
page 57.  
The screen below shows a Video CD.  
Navigate to the track/chapter/title that you  
want to play.  
Track01  
Disc Navigator  
Track (01-99)  
Track01  
Track02  
Track03  
Track04  
Track05  
Track06  
Track07  
Track08  
Total 0.50.50  
Video CD  
Reloading files from a WMA/MP3  
disc  
When this unit reloads a WMA/MP3 disc  
with over 1000 files or over 100 folders, the  
files and folders are displayed in the Disc  
Navigator.  
Playback starts after you press ENTER.  
CD WMA/MP3 DivX  
1
2
Select DVD.  
DVD  
1
Navigate to the last entry in  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
the folder list (‘Read next: ...’).  
Open the Disc Navigator.  
• The Disc Navigator is also accessible  
from the Home Menu.  
ENTER  
2
Load the next batch of up to  
999 files/99 folders from the disc.  
56  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
It takes several minutes for files to be  
reloaded.  
1
ENTER  
3
Choose a view option, then  
press ENTER.  
The title list display is updated according to  
the new display preferences.  
Changing the display style of the  
Disc Navigator  
You can display titles by data format or by  
folder/track.  
Scanning discs  
ALL  
1
Display the view options  
panel.  
You can scan discs at various speeds,  
forwards or backwards.  
2
The view options panel  
REV SCAN FWD SCAN  
Disc Navigator (DVD/CD)  
Track List  
1
During playback, start  
10 Tracks  
TRACK1  
reverse or forward scanning.  
• The scanning speed is shown on-screen.  
Data Format  
TRACK2  
TRACK3  
TRACK4  
TRACK5  
WMA/MP3  
Display Mode  
Track  
REV SCAN FWD SCAN  
MENU  
TRACK6  
2
Press repeatedly to change  
TRACK7  
TRACK8  
the scanning speed.  
TRACK1  
HDD  
There are four scanning speeds available  
when playing HDD video, a DVD or a DivX  
title. Reverse playback is also possible with  
WMA 999MB  
TRACK3  
Track Repeat  
0.05.30  
Remain  
100.0  
G
Stereo  
3
10.00.00  
3
HDD and DVD-Video.  
ENTER  
2
Choose ‘Data Format’ or  
There are two scanning speeds for other  
types of disc.  
‘Display Mode’, then press ENTER to see  
the available view options.  
Data Format  
PLAY  
3
Resume normal playback.  
CD – Displays tracks on an Audio CD.  
WMA/MP3 – Displays WMA/MP3  
folders or tracks.  
Playing in slow motion  
DivX – Displays DivX folders or titles.  
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX  
Display Mode  
You can play video at various slow motion  
speeds. DVDs and video on the HDD can be  
played in slow motion in either direction,  
while Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles  
can only be played forwards in slow motion.  
Folder – Switches to the folder display  
for WMA/MP3 or DivX files.  
Track – Switches to the track display for  
WMA/MP3 files.  
Title – Switches to the title display for  
DivX files.  
There is no sound when playing in slow  
motion.  
Note  
1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the Disc Navigator screen while the recorder is reloading files.  
2 • No subtitles are displayed when scanning DVDs and DivX titles.  
• No sound is output when scanning from the HDD, DVDs and DivX, except on forward SCAN 1.  
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD  
disc.  
57  
En  
3 Reverse playback may not be smooth.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
PLAY MODE  
STEP/SLOW  
Press  
to display the Play Mode  
1
Press to start slow motion  
menu.  
reverse or forward play.  
Play Mode  
STEP/SLOW  
2
Press repeatedly to change  
Time Search  
Title Search  
Chapter Search  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
the slow motion speed.  
The current playback speed is indicated on-  
screen.  
Programme  
PLAY  
3
Resume normal playback.  
• You can also access the Play Mode  
menu from the Home Menu (press  
HOME MENU).  
Frame advance/frame  
reverse  
• Select Play Mode from the command  
menu for Audio CDs, WMA/MP3 files, or  
2
DivX files by pressing in the Disc  
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX  
Navigator.  
• To exit the Play Mode menu, press  
HOME MENU or PLAY MODE.  
You can advance or back up video on a DVD  
disc or the HDD frame-by-frame.  
1
With Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles,  
you can only use frame advance.  
Search Mode  
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX  
PAUSE  
1
2
Pause playback.  
The Search Mode feature lets you start  
playback from a specified point in a disc by  
STEP/SLOW  
3
Back up or advance one  
time or by title/chapter/track number.  
frame with each press.  
PLAY  
ENTER  
3
Resume normal playback.  
1
Select ‘Search Mode’ from the  
Play Mode menu, then choose a search  
option.  
The available search options depend on the  
type of disc.  
The Play Mode menu  
ALL  
ABC  
DEF  
MNO  
WXYZ  
GHI  
JKL  
The Play Mode menu gives you access to  
search functions, repeat and programme  
play functions.  
PQRS  
TUV  
CLEAR  
2
Enter a title/chapter/track  
CLEAR  
number or a search time.  
Play Mode  
Time Search  
Title Search  
Chapter Search  
Input Time  
0.01.00  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
Programme  
Note  
1 Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached.  
2 For DivX files, select Play Mode in the Disc Navigator while playback is stopped and in the Home Menu during  
playback respectively.  
58  
En  
3 When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for  
25 minutes into the current title, press 2, 5,  
0, 0. For 1 hour and 15 minutes and  
• When playing a DVD-Video, DVD-R/-RW  
(Video mode), DVD+R/+RW, or from  
the HDD, the start and end points of the  
loop must be in the same title.  
20 seconds into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0.  
• To resume normal playback, select Off  
from the A-B Repeat menu, or press  
CLEAR if no menu OSD (such as the Play  
Mode menu) is displayed.  
Time Search (Video CD): For example, for  
2 minutes and 30 seconds into the current  
track, press 2, 3, 0.  
Title/Chapter/Track Search: For example, for  
track 6, press 6.  
Repeat play  
ENTER  
3
Start playback.  
ALL  
There are various repeat play options,  
depending on the kind of disc loaded, or if  
you’re using the HDD for playback. It’s also  
possible to use repeat play together with  
programme play to repeat the tracks/  
chapters in the programme list (see  
A-B Repeat  
DVD HDD CD Video CD DivX  
The A-B Repeat function allows you to  
specify two points (A and B) within a track or  
title that form a loop which is played over and  
2
Programme play below).  
1
over.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play  
1
During playback, select ‘A-B  
Mode menu, then choose a repeat play  
mode.  
Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu.  
ENTER  
2
With ‘A (Loop Start)’  
Play Mode  
Repeat Title  
Repeat Chapter  
Repeat Off  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
highlighted, press at the point you want  
the loop to start.  
Programme  
Play Mode  
A (Loop Start)  
B (Loop End)  
Off  
Search Mode  
A-B Repeat  
Repeat  
Programme  
• To resume normal playback, select  
Repeat Off from the Repeat Play menu,  
or press CLEAR if no menu OSD (such as  
the Play Mode menu) is displayed.  
ENTER  
3
With ‘B (Loop End)’ highlighted,  
Programme play  
press at the point you want the loop to  
end.  
Playback immediately jumps back to the  
start point and plays the loop round and  
round.  
HDD DVD-Video CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3  
This feature lets you program the play order  
3
of titles/chapters /folders/tracks on a disc or  
the HDD.  
Note  
1 If you switch camera angles on a DVD during A-B repeat play, A-B repeat is cancelled.  
2 If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is cancelled.  
3 When playing a programme list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the programme list may be  
sometimes be played, depending on the disc.  
59  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
Tip  
ENTER  
1
Select ‘Programme’ from the  
• To save your programme list and exit the  
programme edit screen without starting  
playback, press HOME MENU or PLAY  
MODE.  
Play Mode menu, then ‘Input/Edit  
Programme’.  
The Input/Edit Programme screen varies  
according to the disc type. Below is the DVD  
input screen.  
• Duringprogrammeplay, pressNEXT  
to skip to the next programme step.  
Programme  
• To repeat play the programme list, select  
Repeat Programme from the Repeat  
Play Mode menu (see Repeat play on  
page 59).  
Step  
01.001  
02.  
Title (01-03)  
Title 01  
Chapter(001-015)  
Chapter 001  
Chapter 002  
Chapter 003  
Chapter 004  
Chapter 005  
Chapter 006  
Chapter 007  
Chapter 008  
Title 02  
Title 03  
03.  
04.  
05.  
06.  
07.  
08.  
Except CD, WMA/MP3: Press CLEAR  
during playback to switch off  
programme play (if no menu OSD, such  
as the Disc Navigator, is displayed).  
Press while stopped to erase the  
programme list.  
ENTER  
2
Select a title, chapter, folder  
or track for the current step in the  
programme list.  
After pressing ENTER to add the title/  
chapter/folder/track, the step number  
automatically moves down one.  
• From the Programme menu you can  
also:  
Start Programme Play – Starts  
playback of a saved programme list  
Cancel Programme Play – Turns off  
programme play, but does not erase the  
programme list  
Erase Programme List – Erases the  
programme list and turns off  
programme play  
• To insert a step into the programme list,  
highlight the step number where you  
want to insert another step, then select a  
chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After  
pressing ENTER, all the subsequent  
steps move down one.  
• To delete a step from the programme list,  
highlight the step you want to delete,  
then press CLEAR.  
Displaying and switching  
subtitles  
3
Repeat step 2 to build up a  
DVD-Video DivX  
programme list.  
A programme list can contain up to 24 titles/  
chapters/folders/tracks.  
Some DVD and DivX discs have subtitles in  
one or more languages; the disc box will  
usually tell you which subtitle languages are  
available. You can switch subtitle language  
PLAY  
4
Play the programme list.  
1
during playback.  
Programme play remains active until you  
cancel programme play, erase the  
programme list, eject the disc or switch off  
the recorder.  
Check the disc packaging for details of the  
subtitle options.  
Note  
1 • Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to  
access.  
60  
En  
• To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 113.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
SUBTITLE  
Switching audio channels  
Select/change the subtitle  
language.  
The current subtitle language is shown on-  
screen and in the front panel display.  
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD CD Video CD Super VCD  
WMA/MP3  
• To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE  
then CLEAR.  
Taiwan and Philippines model:  
2
For HDD and VR mode content that has  
both a main and a SAP (Secondary Audio  
Programme) audio channel, you can switch  
Switching DVD and DivX  
soundtracks  
3
between main (L), SAP (R), or both (L+R).  
DVD-Video DivX  
Other:  
2
For HDD and VR mode content recorded with  
When playing a DVD disc or DivX title  
recorded with two or more soundtracks  
(often in different languages), you can  
bilingual audio, you can switch between left  
(L) channel, right (R) channel, or both (L+R).  
3
1
When playing Video CDs and Audio CDs you  
can switch between stereo, just the left  
channel or just the right channel.  
switch the soundtrack during playback.  
Check the disc packaging for details of the  
soundtrack options.  
Some Super VCDs have two soundtracks.  
With these discs you can switch between the  
two soundtracks as well as individual  
channels in each.  
AUDIO  
Change the audio soundtrack.  
The current audio language is shown on-  
screen and in the front panel display.  
AUDIO  
• The sound may drop out for a few  
seconds when switching soundtracks.  
Press repeatedly to display/  
switch the audio channel.  
The audio channel(s) currently playing are  
indicated on-screen.  
• Some discs feature both Dolby Digital  
and DTS soundtracks. There is no analog  
audio output when DTS is selected. To  
listen to the DTS soundtrack, connect  
this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV  
amplifier/receiver with built-in DTS  
decoder via the digital output. See  
Connecting to an AV amplifier or receiver  
on page 20 for connection details.  
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
Taiwan and Philippines model:  
L+R – Both channels (default)  
L – Left/main channel only  
R – Right/SAP channel only  
Other:  
L+R – Both channels (default)  
L – Left channel only  
R – Right channel only  
Note  
1 • Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to  
access.  
• To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 112.  
2 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off (HDD Recording Format on page 115).  
3 When playing a dual mono recording/bilingual recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby  
Digital soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby  
Digital PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 111) or listen via the analog outputs if you need to switch the  
audio channel.  
61  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
of just the currently selected playback/  
recording device (HDD or removable  
disc).  
CD Video CD WMA/MP3  
Stereo – Stereo (default)  
1/L – Left channel only  
2/R – Right channel only  
• To hide the information display, press  
DISPLAY repeatedly until it disappears.  
HDD and removable disc activity  
Super VCD  
display  
1 Stereo – Soundtrack 1/Stereo (default)  
1 L – Soundtrack 1/Left channel  
1 R – Soundtrack 1/Right channel  
2 Stereo – Soundtrack 2/Stereo  
2 L – Soundtrack 2/Left channel  
2 R – Soundtrack 2/Right channel  
Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and  
removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity. Use the  
HDD and DVD button to switch between the  
two kinds of display.  
The example displays below show high-  
speed copying from HDD to DVD, and HDD  
chase playback.  
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)  
Switching camera angles  
HDD  
Hi-Speed Copy  
DVD-RW Video  
HDD DVD  
Remain 10h35m  
Stop  
Remain –h––m  
Stop  
DVD-Video  
0h08m left  
Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot  
from two or more angles — check the disc  
box for details: it should be marked with a  
icon if it contains multi-angle scenes.  
When a multi-angle scene is playing, the  
same icon appears on screen to let you know  
that other angles are available (this can be  
switched off if you prefer — see Angle  
Indicator on page 116).  
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)  
HDD  
DVD-RW Video  
Remain 10h35m  
Chase Play  
Rec  
Remain 0h52m  
Stop  
Recording time  
ANGLE  
Relative playback position  
Switch the camera angle.  
• The angle number is displayed on-  
screen.  
Shows recording restrictions for  
the current channel programme  
• If the disc was paused, playback starts  
again with the new angle.  
Stop  
DVD-RW VR  
Original  
WNBC  
Stereo  
Copy Once  
Resume  
XP (1h00m/DVD)  
Finalized  
Rem. 0h35m  
Displaying disc information  
on-screen  
Disc Name  
:
Comedy shows  
Indicates copy-protected material  
Indicates a multi-angle scene  
You can display various on-screen  
information about the disc loaded or the  
HDD.  
Play  
3–2  
0. 00. 15  
!
DVD-R Video Chapter Time 0. 00. 21  
Chapter Total 0h01m52s  
DISPLAY  
Display/change the on-screen  
  
4.32Mbps  
information.  
Title Name  
:
11/21 Soccer game  
• Press once to show the HDD and  
removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity  
together. Press again to show the status  
Indicates the data transfer rate  
62  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
06  
Tip  
• See Switching camera angles on page 62  
for more on multi-angle scene switching.  
• When using the simultaneous play and  
record feature, the display shows  
information for playback only.  
• During real-time copy, the copy source  
playback information is displayed.  
• The Video mode DVD-R/-RW displays  
become the same as a DVD-Video disc  
once the disc is finalized.  
• The total recording time figure shown in  
parenthesis is calculated based on a  
12 cm/4.7 GB disc at the displayed  
record setting.  
• Recording and playback times for TV  
recordings are approximately 0.1 %  
shorter than the actual time. This is  
because of the slightly different frame  
rates of TV broadcasts versus DVD.  
• The frame number is shown next to the  
elapsed time display when the disc is  
paused.  
Copy Once or Can’t Record messages  
may appear in the stop or recording  
displays. These indicate that the  
broadcast TV programme contains copy  
control information.  
63  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder  
07  
CPhlaapteyr i7ng and recording from a  
DV camcorder  
You can play back and record video from a  
DV camcorder connected to the DV IN jack  
on the front panel of this recorder.  
• The recorder will only start recording  
from the DV IN jack if there is a valid  
signal. Recording will pause if the signal  
is interrupted during recording.  
Important  
• If your source is copy-protected using  
Copy Guard, you will not be able to  
record it. See Restrictions on video  
recording on page 34 for more details.  
• If you connect a second recorder using a  
DV cable, you cannot control the second  
unit from this one.  
• You can’t control this unit remotely from  
a component connected to the DV IN  
jack.  
Recording from a DV  
camcorder  
• The source signal must be DVC-SD  
format.  
Playing from a DV camcorder  
• You can’t record date and time  
information from DV cassette.  
1
Make sure your DV camcorder is  
connected to the front panel DV IN jack.  
From the Initial Setup menu, check  
• During DV recording, if a part of the tape  
is blank, or has copy-protected material  
on it, this recorder will pause recording.  
Recording will restart automatically  
when there is a recordable signal.  
However, if there is more than two  
minutes of blank tape, this recorder will  
stop recording and the camcorder  
should stop (depending on the  
2
that the DV audio input is setup as you  
would like.  
See DV Input on page 111 for more on this.  
• Check also that the Audio In settings for  
External Audio and Dual Mono  
Recording/Bilingual Recording are as  
you want them (see Audio In on  
page 110).  
camcorder).  
HOME  
MENU  
Copying from a DV source  
Using the recorder’s remote, you can control  
both the camcorder and this recorder.  
3
Select ‘DV’, then ‘DV Video  
Playback’ from the Home Menu.  
Start playback on the camcorder.  
4
Images from the camcorder should appear  
on your TV.  
Important  
• Some camcorders cannot be controlled  
using this recorder’s remote.  
• To record the incoming video, use the  
HDD and DVD button to select the HDD  
or a DVD for recording, then press  
REC. Press F STOP REC to finish  
recording. If there is no signal from the  
device connected to the DV jack, or the  
signal is copy-protected, recording will  
pause. It will automatically restart once  
there is a recordable signal.  
• For best results when recording from a  
DV camcorder to this recorder, we  
recommend cueing the camcorder to  
the place you want to start recording  
from and setting the camcorder to  
play-pause.  
64  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder  
07  
1
Make sure your DV camcorder is  
control the camcorder from this remote  
connected to the front panel DV IN jack.  
control during recording.  
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.  
• If you restart recording after stopping the  
camcorder, the first few seconds of the  
camcorder tape will not be recorded.  
Use the pause button on your camcorder  
instead and recording will start  
immediately.  
REC MODE  
2
Set the recording quality.  
• See Setting the picture quality/recording  
time on page 36 for detailed information.  
3
From the Initial Setup menu, check  
that the DV audio input is setup as you  
would like.  
See DV Input on page 111 for more on this.  
HDD, DVD (VR Mode) and DVD-RAM only:  
A chapter marker is inserted every time  
there is a break in the timecode on the  
DV tape. This happens when the  
recording is stopped or paused then  
restarted, for example.  
• Check also that the Audio In settings for  
External Audio and Dual Mono  
Recording/Bilingual Recording are as  
you want them (see Audio In on  
page 110).  
• If you don’t want to see the DV recording  
screen during recording, press DISPLAY  
to hide it (press again to display).  
HOME  
MENU  
• While recording, you cannot exit the DV  
recording screen using the HOME  
MENU or RETURN button.  
4
Select ‘DV’, then ‘Copy from a DV  
Source’ from the Home Menu.  
• DV recording only works when the DV  
camcorder is in VTR mode with a tape  
loaded.  
DV Auto Copy  
DV Auto Copy allows you to make an exact  
copy of the contents of a DV source to the  
HDD or a DVD.  
ENTER  
5
Select ‘Record to Hard Disk  
Drive’ or ‘Record to DVD’.  
Find the place on the camcorder tape  
1
Make sure your DV camcorder is  
connected to the front panel DV IN jack.  
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.  
6
that you want to start recording from.  
For best results, pause playback at the point  
from which you want to record.  
REC MODE  
2
Set the recording quality.  
• See Setting the picture quality/recording  
time on page 36 for detailed information.  
• Depending on your camcorder, you can  
use this recorder’s remote to control the  
camcorder using the , , , ,  
, and buttons.  
3
From the Initial Setup menu, check  
that the DV audio input is setup as you  
require.  
See DV Input on page 111 for more on this.  
ENTER  
7
Select ‘Start Rec’.  
• Check also that the Audio In settings for  
External Audio and Dual Mono  
Recording/Bilingual Recording are as  
you want them (see Audio In on  
page 110).  
Stop  
1.02.22  
Stop  
Control with these  
buttons  
Start Rec  
Pause Rec  
Stop Rec  
HOME  
MENU  
HDD  
Rem.  
SP (2h00m/DVD)  
32h45m  
4
Select ‘DV’, then ‘DV Auto Copy’  
from the Home Menu.  
• DV recording only works when the DV  
camcorder is in VTR mode with a tape  
loaded.  
• You can pause or stop the recording by  
selecting Pause Rec or Stop Rec from  
the on-screen display. You cannot  
65  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing and recording from a DV camcorder  
07  
• There’s a picture, but no sound!  
ENTER  
Try switching the DV Input setting (see  
5
Select ‘Record to Hard Disk  
DV Input on page 111) between Stereo 1  
Drive’ or ‘Record to DVD’.  
1
and Stereo 2.  
The DV tape is rewound to the beginning.  
Once it is rewound, the DV tape is played  
from the beginning and copied to either the  
HDD or a DVD.  
About DV  
Using DV, also known as i.LINK or IEEE 1394-  
1995, you can connect a DV camcorder to  
this recorder using a DV cable for input of  
audio, video, data and control signals.  
• If there is a gap of two minutes or more  
between recorded contents, the copying  
process is automatically stopped.  
• Once copying is finished, the DV tape is  
automatically rewound.  
“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are  
trademarks.  
• To cancel the copying process, press  
F STOP REC for more than three  
seconds.  
• This recorder is only compatible with DV-  
format (DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital  
satellite receivers and Digital VHS video  
recorders are not compatible.  
About automatic finalization  
If you use a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or  
DVD+R/+RW disc for copying, it will  
automatically be finalized after copying is  
complete.  
• You cannot connect more than one DV  
camcorder at a time to this recorder.  
• You cannot control this recorder from  
external equipment connected via the  
DV IN jack.  
• You can’t customize the background for  
DVD-R/-RW or DVD+R/+RW disc  
finalization.  
• It may not always be possible to control  
the connected camcorder via the DV IN  
jack.  
• No title names are assigned.  
• DV camcorders can usually record audio  
as stereo 16-bit/48 kHz, or twin stereo  
tracks of 12-bit/32 kHz. This recorder can  
only record one stereo audio track. Set  
the DV Input setting as required (see DV  
Input on page 111).  
• If you want to give the disc a name,  
please do so before you start the copy  
(see Input Disc Name on page 102).  
• If a timer recording is scheduled to start,  
and in some other instances, the disc  
will not be finalized.  
• Audio input to the DV IN jack should be  
32 kHz or 48 kHz (not 44.1 kHz).  
Frequently Asked Questions  
• Picture disturbance in the recording  
may occur if the source component  
pauses playback or plays an unrecorded  
section of tape, or if the power fails in the  
source component, or the DV cable is  
disconnected.  
• I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with  
the recorder!  
Check that the DV cable is properly  
connected. Also make sure that what  
you’re trying to record is not copy-  
protected.  
• The DV IN jack is an input only. There is  
no output functionality.  
If it still doesn’t work, try switching off  
the camcorder then switch back on.  
Note  
1 If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You  
can switch the audio manually from the External Audio setting (page 110).  
66  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
Chapter 8  
Editing  
Editing options  
The table below shows which commands you can use with the HDD and different disc types.  
DVD-R/-RW  
(Video mode),  
DVD+R/+RW  
DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM  
HDD  
(VR mode)  
Original  
Play List  
Create (page 69)  
Play (page 69)  
Erase (page 69)  
Edit > Title Name (page 70)  
Edit > Set Thumbnail  
(page 72)  
Edit > Erase Section  
(page 72)  
Edit > Divide (page 73)  
Edit > Chapter Edit (page 73)  
Edit > Set Genre (page 74)  
Edit > Lock (page 75)  
Edit > Move (page 75)  
Edit > Combine (page 76)  
Genre Name (page 76)  
Multi-Mode (page 77)  
Undo (page 78)  
*1  
*1  
*1 DVD-R/-RW only  
67  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
The Disc Navigator screen  
Press to display the command  
menu panel. Use the / and ENTER  
buttons to navigate the menus.  
The Disc Navigator screen is where you can  
edit video content on unfinalized Video mode  
and DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) discs, DVD+R/  
+RW and DVD-RAM, as well as video  
content on the hard disk drive.  
PREV  
NEXT  
When in the title list, press to  
display the previous/next page if there  
are more titles than can be displayed.  
Important  
DISPLAY  
• Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs  
shown in this manual are for the Taiwan  
and Philippines model.  
Press to change the title  
information displayed in the title list.  
HDD  
DVD  
Press to switch  
• Titles that have been recorded with a  
Input Line System setting different to the  
current setting of the recorder are shown  
in the Disc Navigator with a blank  
thumbnail image. See also Additional  
information about the TV system settings  
on page 119.  
between the HDD and DVD Disc  
Navigator screens.  
• If you are editing a DVD-R/-RW (VR  
mode) or DVD-RAM disc you can display  
the Play List by selecting Play List from  
the view options panel (press , then  
select Play List from the view options,  
then Play List).  
• During recording, if you display the Disc  
Navigator for the HDD, some of the titles  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
10Titles  
may appear with a  
mark. These titles  
12/03 SUN 11:00PM  
12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP  
Style  
were recorded with a Input Line System  
setting different to the current setting of  
the recorder. During recording, these  
titles cannot be played.  
4
Titles  
2h00m(1.0G)  
12/03 SUN 8:00PM  
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
PlayList  
Original  
MENU  
• Titles on the HDD marked with a  
icon are recently recorded titles that  
haven’t yet been played.  
HDD  
DVD  
1
Select the HDD or  
DVD.  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
2
Display the Disc Navigator  
3
Press to exit the Disc  
screen.  
Navigator.  
Playback will automatically stop when you  
do this.  
Editing accuracy  
• The Disc Navigator is also accessible  
from the Home Menu.  
Some editing commands ask you whether  
you want to keep Video mode compatibility  
or frame accuracy (Video Mode Compatible  
Editing or Frame Accurate Editing).  
View options panel  
Title list  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
10
12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP  
Frame Accurate Editing is very precise. The  
edit point is accurate to the exact frame you  
choose. However, this accuracy is not  
preserved in any copy you make if you use  
the high-speed copy function to make a  
DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW.  
12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP  
Selected  
title  
2h00m(1.0G)  
4
Titles  
9
8
7
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP  
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Recent first  
All Genres  
MENU  
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch SP  
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
HDD  
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
Available  
recording  
time  
30h30m  
Title  
thumbnail information menu panel  
Title  
Command  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is less  
precise. The edit point you choose will only  
be accurate to within one-half to one second.  
On the other hand, these edit points will be  
68  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
preserved if you use high-speed copy to  
make a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or  
DVD+R/+RW.  
1
Highlight the title you want  
Select ‘Play’ from the  
to play.  
HDD genres  
ENTER  
The large capacity of the HDD means that  
there may be many hours of video in the  
recorder. To help you organize your HDD  
video content you can assign different  
genres to titles. There are 10 genres in total,  
including 10 user-definable ones that you  
can name as you like.  
2
command menu panel.  
Playback of the title you selected starts.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
10  
12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch
Play  
12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch
Erase  
2
4
Titles  
Edit  
9
8
7
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch 
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch
Create  
Recent first  
All Genres  
2
Genre Name  
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch 
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch 
1
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
Play List only  
Multi-Mode  
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Use this function to create a Play List and  
add titles to it.  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
Before you can use this command, make  
sure that the Play List is switched on in the  
view options panel on the left.  
Erase  
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD  
ENTER  
Use this function to erase unwanted titles.  
1
Select ‘Create’ from the  
When you erase titles from the HDD or  
Original titles from a VR mode DVD-RW, the  
available recording space increases  
command menu panel.  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
0Titles  
accordingly. Erasing a title from a DVD-RW  
(Video mode) or DVD+RW disc increases  
the available recording time only if it is the  
Play  
No title  
Erase  
Edit  
4
Titles  
1
Play List  
last title on the disc.  
Create  
Erasing Play List titles, or titles from a DVD-R  
(VR mode or Video mode) or DVD+R, will not  
result in any more free space on the disc.  
Undo  
DVD  
VR Mode  
Remain  
0h30m  
ENTER  
1
Highlight the title you want  
2
Select an original title to add  
to erase.  
to the Play List.  
Repeat these two steps to add as many titles  
as necessary to the Play List.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Erase’ from the  
command menu panel.  
Play  
ENTER  
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD  
3
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’  
Use this function to start playback of a title.  
to cancel.  
Note  
69  
En  
1 There may be cases where erasing a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc will result in incontiguous title numbers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
• A name generated automatically by the  
recorder will already be in the name  
input section of the screen. Use the  
REV SCAN/FWD SCAN  
Tip  
• You can erase a title quickly by pressing  
CLEAR when the title is highlighted.  
Confirm the edit by pressing ENTER.  
buttons to change the cursor position.  
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper  
or lower-case, or use the CASE  
SELECTION buttons (PREV/  
NEXT).  
Title Name  
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD  
• You can also use the CLEAR button to  
delete characters directly (press and  
hold for two seconds to delete the whole  
name). For other remote control key  
shortcuts, see Using the remote key  
shortcuts to input a name on page 71.  
You can give titles new names of up to  
64 characters long for VR mode, DVD-RAM  
and HDD recordings, and up to  
40 characters for Video mode recordings  
and DVD+R/+RW discs.  
• For discs formatted on a different DVD  
recorder, you will see only a limited  
character set.  
1
Highlight the title you want  
to name (or rename).  
ENTER  
ENTER  
4
Select ‘OK’ to enter the name  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Title Name’  
and return to the main Disc Navigator  
screen.  
from the command menu panel.  
• To return to the main Disc Navigator  
screen without saving changes to the  
title name, press RETURN.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
10  
12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch
12/03 Sun 11:00PM
Title Name  
Set Thumbnail  
4
Titles  
Erase Section  
9
8
7
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9
Divide  
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9
Chapter Edit  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Set Genre  
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7
Lock
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7
Cancel
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
ENTER  
3
Input a name for the selected  
title.  
Input Title Name  
12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP  
A B C D E F G H  
I
J
K L M .  
,
?
:
!
CAPS  
small  
N
O
P
Q
R
S T U V W X Y Z  
(
)
;
Æ ç  
A A A A A A  
E
E
E
E
I
I
I
I
#
D
0
N
1
O
2
O
3
O
4
O O  
ø
U U U U Y  
=
ß $  
_
%
&
5
6
]
7
8
9
<
|
¬
>
~
+ – / @ [ ¥  
ˆ
x
{
}
¡
_
a
<<  
c
£
\
§
·
¨
¸
© –  
/
®
¿
/4  
°
`
< < 1  
o
1
3
2
3
1
/4  
2
´
OK  
Clear  
Space  
70  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
Using the remote key shortcuts to  
input a name  
The table below shows the remote control  
key shortcuts that you can use to input  
characters in the name input screen.  
Pressing a button repeatedly cycles through  
the characters shown.  
Using a USB keyboard to enter a name  
Using a USB keyboard connected to this  
recorder makes entering names very quick  
1
and convenient. When in USB keyboard  
input mode, a USB icon ( ) appears in the  
2
lower-left of the screen.  
Other than the standard alpha-numeric keys,  
use the following keys when entering names:  
If you want to enter two characters in  
succession that are both on the same button  
(for example a P and an R), press  
FWD SCAN to advance the cursor one  
space manually between inputting the two  
characters.  
Key  
Function  
Change the cursor position  
   
Select CAPS  
F1  
Key  
1
Characters  
Key  
6
Characters  
. , ’ ? ! – & 1  
m n o 6 ö ô ò ó  
ø ñ  
Select small  
F2  
a b c 2 ä à á â ã  
æ ç  
p q r s 7 $  
ÿ/ß *1  
Delete character at the current  
cursor position  
2
7
delete  
Delete the character at the  
previous cursor position  
d e f 3 è é ë ê  
g h i 4 î ï ì í ¡  
j k l 5 £  
t u v 8 ü ù û ú  
3
4
8
9
back  
space  
w x y z 9  
0
Enter the name  
enter  
5
0
[cursor back]  
[cursor  
forward]  
Exit the input screen  
esc  
/ [change case] CLEAR  
[clear  
character]  
<space>  
[finish name  
input]  
~ ( ) _ / : ; ” ` ^ @ # % ¥ | + =  
+
{ } [ ] < >  
*1  
lower-case: ÿ; upper-case: ß  
Note  
1 • It’s possible that some USB keyboards will not work exactly as expected when connected to this recorder. See  
also Connecting a USB device on page 23 for more connection information.  
• Certain keyboards may not be able to correctly input all characters.  
2 If you use the remote control to enter a name when in the USB keyboard input mode, the recorder will  
automatically switch to remote control input mode. Press any key on the USB keyboard to return to USB  
keyboard input mode.  
71  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
Set Thumbnail  
Erase Section  
HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM  
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
You can change the thumbnail picture that  
appears in the Disc Navigator for a title to  
any frame that appears in that title.  
Using this command you can delete a part of  
a title, ideal for cutting out the commercial  
breaks in a recording made from the TV.  
1
Highlight the title you want  
1
Highlight the title containing  
to change the thumbnail picture for.  
the section you want to erase.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Thumbnail’  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Erase Section’  
from the command menu panel.  
from the command menu panel.  
The thumbnail setting screen appears from  
which you can find the frame you want.  
ENTER  
3
edit.  
HDD only: Select the type of  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
10  
12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch
12/03 Sun 11:00PM
Title Name  
HDD/DVD RECORDER  
Set Thumbnail  
4
Titles  
Erase Section  
9
8
7
Please select the type of editing.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is  
recommended for compatibility with  
high-speed copying.  
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9
Divide  
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9
Chapter Edit  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Set Genre  
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7
Lock
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7
Cancel
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
Video Mode Compatible Editing  
Frame Accurate Editing  
3
Use the playback controls (, , ,  
• For more information about these  
options, see Editing accuracy on page 68.  
, etc.) to find a suitable frame, then  
press ENTER to set.  
4
Highlight ‘From’ then use the  
Set Thumbnail (HDD)  
playback controls (, , , , etc.) to  
find the start of the section to erase, then  
press ENTER.  
12/03 Sun 11:00 PM 4ch SP  
2h00m  
Rec. time  
The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates  
the current play position in the title. After  
pressing ENTER, a marker shows the start of  
the section.  
10-1 00.00.09.15  
Play Pause  
OK  
Exit  
Erase Section (HDD)  
You can also use the chapter and time  
12/03 Sun 11:00 PM 4ch SP  
search features (press PLAY MODE), and  
2h00m  
Rec. time  
the  
CM SKIP and  
CM BACK buttons.  
10-1 00.00.09.15  
Play Pause  
4
Select ‘Exit’ to return to the  
From  
To  
Exit  
Edit screen.  
72  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
4
Use the playback controls (, , ,  
ENTER  
, etc.) to find the place you want to  
divide the title.  
5
Highlight ‘To’ then, in the  
same way, find the end of the section to  
erase, then press ENTER.  
Divide Title (HDD)  
12/03 Sun 11:00 PM 4ch SP  
After pressing ENTER, another marker  
indicates the end of the section, with the  
section itself marked in red.  
2h00m  
Rec. time  
10–1 00.00.09.15  
Play Pause  
ENTER  
Divide  
Cancel  
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’  
to cancel.  
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few  
seconds of video either side of the marked  
section to see how the edit will look.  
ENTER  
5
Press to divide the title at the  
current playback position.  
• When editing VR mode Original content,  
you may not be able to erase very short  
sections (less than five seconds).  
ENTER  
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’  
to cancel.  
Divided titles cannot  
be combined.  
OK?  
!
Divide  
Yes  
No  
HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
Play List only  
Use this command to divide a title into two.  
Note that once divided, the two new HDD  
titles cannot be recombined into one again.  
Chapter Edit  
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD  
When editing a VR mode DVD or video on  
the HDD you can edit individual chapters  
within a title, with commands for erasing,  
combining and dividing.  
1
Highlight the title you want  
to divide.  
ENTER  
1
Highlight the title that contains the  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Divide’ from  
chapters you want to edit.  
the command menu panel.  
3
HDD only: Select the type of edit.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Chapter Edit’  
HDD/DVD RECORDER  
from the command menu panel.  
Please select the type of editing.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is  
recommended for compatibility with  
high-speed copying.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing  
Frame Accurate Editing  
• For more information about these  
options, see Editing accuracy on page 68.  
73  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
Move command only: Select the  
destination for the chapter, and press  
ENTER.  
ENTER  
3
edit.  
HDD only: Select the type of  
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)  
HDD/DVD RECORDER  
12/03 Sun 11:00 PM 
Erase  
Please select the type of editing.  
Video Mode Compatible Editing is  
recommended for compatibility with  
high-speed copying.  
1h
Move  
Rec. time  
Chapter  
0h
Cancel  
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
Exit  
Divide  
Erase/Move  
Combine  
Video Mode Compatible Editing  
Frame Accurate Editing  
3
Combine – Combine two adjacent  
chapters into one: Highlight the bar  
divider between two adjacent chapters  
and press ENTER.  
• For more information about these  
options, see Editing accuracy on page 68.  
4
Select the command you want:  
Divide – Divide a chapter into two or  
more parts: Use the playback controls  
(, , , , etc.) to find the point at  
which you want to divide the chapter,  
then press ENTER.  
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)  
12/03 Sun 11:00 PM 4ch SP  
1h00m  
Rec. time  
1
2
3
4
5
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)  
12/03 Sun 11:00 PM 4ch SP  
Exit  
Divide  
Erase/Move  
Combine  
1h00m  
5
Rec. time  
Chapters  
1–1  
0.00.00  
Play  
ENTER  
Exit  
Divide  
Erase/Move  
Combine  
5
Select ‘Exit’ to get back to the  
main Disc Navigator screen.  
You can keep dividing the chapter as  
many times as you wish (up to  
Set Genre  
999 chapters per DVD-R/-RW/-RAM disc  
or 99 chapters per HDD title).  
HDD  
1
2
Use this command to assign a genre to a  
title.  
Erase /Move – Erase or move  
chapters: Select the chapter you want to  
erase/move and press ENTER. Select  
whether you want to erase or move the  
chapter.  
1
Highlight the title you want  
to assign a genre to.  
Note  
1 When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long.  
2 VR mode Play List only.  
3 It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been  
divided into three, then the middle chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into  
one.  
74  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
ENTER  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Genre’ from  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Lock’ from the  
the command menu panel.  
command menu panel.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
10Titles  
10Titles  
10  
12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch
12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch
Title Name  
12/03 Sun 11:00PM
12/03 Sun 11:00PM
Title Name  
Set Thumbnail  
Set Thumbnail  
4
Titles  
4
Titles  
Erase Section  
Erase Section  
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9
9
9
8
7
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9
Divide  
Divide  
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9
Chapter Edit  
Chapter Edit  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Set Genre  
Set Genre  
8
7
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7
Lock
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7
Lock
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7
Cancel
Cancel
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
An unlocked title will become locked; a  
locked title will be unlocked. Locked titles are  
shown in the Disc Navigator with a padlock  
icon.  
ENTER  
3
Select a genre for the title.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10  
10Titles  
12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch
Move  
12/03Sun 11:00PM
No Category  
4
Titles  
Free1  
9
Free2  
12/03 SUN 8:00PM
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 
ee3  
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
Play List only  
F
r
Recent first  
All Genres  
Free4  
Free5  
Use this function to re-arrange the playing  
order of Play List titles.  
8
7
12/02 SAT 10:00PM
Free6  
12/02 Sat 10:00PM
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
1
Highlight the title you want  
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Move’ from the  
to move.  
Lock  
HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM  
ENTER  
2
Original only  
command menu panel.  
You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited  
or erased accidently. If you do need to edit it,  
you can always unlock it later.  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
10Titles  
1
2
3
4
12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4c
12/03 Sun 11:00PM
Title Name  
humbnail
Se  
t
T
4
Titles  
EraseSection  
12/03 SUN 8:00PM
Important  
Divide  
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 
Chapter Edit  
Play List  
Move  
• You can’t undo any edits made before  
changing the lock status. You also can’t  
undo a lock/unlock command using the  
Undo option from the Disc Navigator  
menu.  
12/02 SAT 10:00PM Combine  
12/02 Sat 10:00PM
Cancel  
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
DVD  
VR Mode  
Remain  
0h30m  
1
Highlight the title you want to lock  
(or unlock).  
75  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
ENTER  
ENTER  
3
Select a new position for the  
3
Select another title to  
title.  
combine with the first.  
This title will be appended to the first title  
selected.  
Title to move  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
10Titles  
The screen below shows title 3 selected to be  
appended to title 1.  
1
12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP  
12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
4
Titles  
2
3
4
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP  
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
10Titles  
Play List  
MENU  
1
12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch SP  
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch SP  
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP  
12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch SP  
2h00m(1.0G)  
4
Titles  
1h00m(1.0G)  
2
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch SP  
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch SP  
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
DVD  
VR Mode  
Remain  
0h30m  
Play List  
MENU  
2h00m(1.0G)  
1h00m(1.0G)  
3
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch SP  
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Insert position  
4
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
DVD  
VR Mode  
After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
0h30m  
List is displayed.  
ENTER  
Combine  
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’  
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
Play List only  
to cancel.  
Use this function to combine two Play List  
titles into one.  
OK to combine titles  
1 and 3 ?  
!
Yes  
No  
1
Highlight the title you want  
Genre Name  
to combine.  
This title will remain in the same place after  
combining with another title.  
HDD  
Use this command to rename one of the five  
user-definable genres (Free 1 to Free 10).  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Combine’ from  
ENTER  
the command menu panel.  
1
Select ‘Genre Name’ from the  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
command menu panel.  
10Titles  
1
2
12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4c
12/03 Sun 11:00PM
Title Name  
humbnail
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
Se  
t
T
4
Titles  
EraseSection  
12/03 SUN 8:00PM
Divide  
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 
Chapter Edit  
10  
12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch
Play  
12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch
Play List  
Erase  
2
4
Titles  
Move  
Edit  
9
8
7
3
12/02 SAT 10:00PM Combine  
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch 
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch
12/02 Sat 10:00PM
Recent first  
All Genres  
Cancel  
Genre Name  
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch 
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch 
Multi-Mode  
4
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
DVD  
VR Mode  
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
0h30m  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
76  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
Multi-Mode  
ENTER  
HDD  
2
Select one of the user-  
definable genre names.  
Multi-Mode allows you to select several  
titles, then select a command that will be  
applied to all of them. In this way you can  
select multiple titles and then erase them all  
at once, for example.  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
10  
12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch
12/03 Sun 11:00PM
Free1  
Free2  
Free3  
4
Titles  
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9
Free4  
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9
Free5  
9
8
7
Recent first  
All Genres  
Free6  
Free7
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7
ENTER  
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
1
Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the  
HDD  
SP  
command menu panel.  
Remain  
30h30m  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
10Titles  
10  
12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4ch
ENTER  
Play  
12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch
Erase  
3
Input a name for the genre.  
2
4
Titles  
Edit  
9
8
7
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch 
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch
• The name can be up to 12 characters  
long.  
Recent first  
All Genres  
2
Genre Name  
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch 
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch 
Multi-Mode  
• For information on remote control key  
short cuts, see Using the remote key  
shortcuts to input a name on page 71.  
1
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
HDD  
SP  
Remain  
30h30m  
Input Genre Name  
Free  
1
ENTER  
A B C D E  
F
G H  
I
J
K L M  
.
(
I
,
)
I
ß
_
}
˚
`
?
:
!
;
CAPS  
small  
2
Select titles from the title list.  
N
A
D
0
O
A
N
1
P
A
O
2
Q
A
O
3
R
A
O
4
S T U V WX Y Z  
ç
A
O
5
[
§
·
Æ
O
6
E
U
8
ˆ
E
U
9
÷
<<  
E
U
<
x
E
U
=
I
I
#
%
Selected titles are marked with a .  
ø
7
]
Y
>
{
$
&
~
+
/
@
¥
|
¡
_
a
c
£
\
µ
¨
¸
©
¬
/2  
®
/4  
< < 14  
/
o
1
3
2
3
1
¿
´
ENTER  
Space  
OK  
Clear  
3
Select the command that you  
want applied to all the marked titles.  
For example, select Erase to erase all the  
marked titles.  
ENTER  
4
and exit.  
Select ‘OK’ to enter the name  
Disc Navigator (HDD)  
Multi-Mode  
10Titles  
12/03 SUN 11:00PM 4c
12/03 Sun 11:00PM 4ch
Erase  
Lock  
4
Titles  
Unlock  
9
12/03 SUN 8:00PM 9ch Change Genre  
12/03 Sun 8:00PM 9ch
Recent first  
All Genres  
12/02 SAT 10:00PM 7ch Single-Mode  
12/02 Sat 10:00PM 7ch 
11/29 WED 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
HDD  
SP  
1h00m(1.0G)  
Remain  
30h30m  
Once the command is completed, Multi-  
Mode is automatically exited.  
77  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing  
08  
Undo  
DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW  
If you make a mistake while editing, you can  
generally undo it. There is one level of undo  
(in other words, you can only undo the last  
edit you made).  
ENTER  
Select ‘Undo’ from the  
command menu panel.  
• You can’t undo anything after exiting the  
Disc Navigator screen.  
Disc Navigator (DVD)  
0Titles  
No title  
Play  
Erase  
4
Titles  
Edit  
Play List  
Create  
Undo  
DVD  
VR Mode  
Remain  
0h30m  
Frequently asked questions  
• Why doesn’t the available recording time  
increase when I erase titles from a VR  
mode DVD-R?  
When you erase titles from a DVD-R (or  
DVD+R), the titles are no longer  
displayed, but the content remains on  
the disc. DVD-R/+R are write-once  
media; they can’t be erased or rewritten.  
• I can’t edit my disc!  
You may find that as the available  
recording time is reduced on a VR mode  
DVD-R disc, editing is no longer  
possible. This is because information  
about your edits requires a certain  
amount of disc space. As you edit, this  
information builds up, eventually  
preventing you from editing further.  
78  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and backup  
09  
Chapter 9  
Copying and backup  
Restrictions on copying  
Introduction  
Commercial DVD-Video discs are protected  
using Copy Guard. These discs cannot be  
copied to the HDD.  
Use the copying features of this recorder to:  
• Back up important recordings stored on  
the HDD to a DVD.  
Some video material is copy-once protected.  
This means that it can be recorded to HDD,  
but it can’t then be freely copied again. If you  
want to transfer copy-once protected  
material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to a  
CPRM ver. 1.1 or higher VR mode DVD-RW,  
ver. 2.0 or 2.1 VR mode DVD-R, or CPRM-  
compatible DVD-RAM disc (see CPRM on  
page 35 for more on this). Only one instance  
of a copy-once protected title can be added  
to the Copy List, and after it’s been copied,  
the title is erased from the HDD (it is  
• Make a DVD copy of a recording on the  
HDD to play in another player.  
• Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD  
for editing.  
• Transfer edited video from the HDD to  
DVD.  
The simplest way to copy a title is to use the  
One Touch Copy feature. This copies the  
currently playing HDD title to DVD, or DVD  
title to the HDD. See One Touch Copy below  
for detailed instructions.  
therefore not possible to copy a locked title  
that is copy-once protected).  
For more sophisticated copying tasks you  
can build a Copy List of titles to copy, and  
edit titles so that you only copy the bits you  
want. See Using Copy Lists on page 81 for  
detailed instructions.  
You can identify copy-once protected  
material during playback by displaying disc  
information on-screen. If the current title is  
copy-once protected, an exclamation mark  
( ! ) is shown.  
Where possible, the recorder will copy your  
recordings at high-speed. Depending on the  
recording mode, the kind of disc loaded and  
various other factors, copying can be as fast  
as one minute per hour of video. See  
Minimum copying times on page 121 for  
more on copying times.  
Copyright  
Recording equipment should be used only  
for lawful copying and you are advised to  
check carefully what is lawful copying in the  
country in which you are making a copy.  
Copying of copyright material such as films  
or music is unlawful unless permitted by a  
legal exception or consented to by the  
rightowners.  
If you want to save disc space you can copy  
video at a lower recording quality (for  
example, an XP recording on the HDD  
copied to SP on a DVD). Copying in this way  
is always done in real-time.  
When real-time copying from the HDD to a  
DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW,  
the chapter markers in the original material  
are not copied. Chapter markers are put into  
the copy at intervals, according to the Auto  
Chapter settings (see also Auto Chapter  
(Video) and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on  
page 114).  
One Touch Copy  
* See also Copyright above.  
The One Touch Copy feature copies the  
currently playing or selected (in the Disc  
Navigator) HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to  
HDD. The whole title is copied, regardless of  
where in the title you start the copy.  
79  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and backup  
09  
HDD to DVD copies are made in the same  
recording mode. When copying DVD to  
HDD, the copy is made in whatever  
recording mode is currently set.  
• The chapter markers in the copy may not  
be in exactly the same positions as the  
original when recording on to a DVD-R/  
-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW.  
• You can’t use the One Touch Copy  
function to copy a title if any part of the  
title is copy-once protected.  
Make sure that a recordable DVD disc is  
loaded when trying to copy from the HDD.  
REC MODE  
• A title that contains mixed aspect ratios  
can’t be copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video  
mode) or DVD+R/+RW. Use a DVD-R/  
-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM disc for this  
type of material.  
1
If you’re copying from DVD to  
the HDD, select a recording mode.  
Note that selecting a recording mode higher  
than the title playing will not result in a better  
quality recording.  
1
• Low resolution (SEP through LP modes )  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
widescreen material can’t be copied to a  
DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/  
+RW. Use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or  
DVD-RAM disc for this type of material.  
2
Press during playback to copy  
the current title.  
The front panel display indicates that the title  
is being copied.  
• When HDD Recording Format is set to  
Video Mode Off, titles recorded in LP/  
MN9 to MN15 modes cannot be high-  
speed copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video  
mode) or DVD+R/+RW. Please use a  
DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM.  
• High-speed copying is used when  
copying from the HDD to DVD. Playback  
continues while copying.  
• Real-time copying is used when copying  
from DVD to the HDD. Playback restarts  
from the beginning of the title.  
• Recordings of dual mono/bilingual  
broadcasts cannot be high-speed copied  
to a DVD -R/-RW (Video mode) or  
DVD+R/+RW. Please use a DVD-R/-RW  
(VR mode) or DVD-RAM.  
Cancelling One Touch Copy  
You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it’s  
started.  
ONE TOUCH  
COPY  
XP+ titles cannot be copied to DVD via  
One Touch Copy.  
Press and hold for more than a  
second.  
• Titles over eight hours cannot be copied  
to single-layer DVD+R/+RW discs using  
One Touch Copy. Use DVD+R DL discs  
for titles over eight hours.  
Copying is cancelled and the video already  
copied is erased.  
• If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R/+R copy,  
the space available for recording does  
not return to the pre-copy figure.  
• Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP  
or EP mode cannot be copied to DVD+R/  
+RW using One Touch Copy.  
Notes on copying using One Touch  
Copy  
Copying to the HDD  
• The maximum title length for copying is  
12 hours.  
Copying to DVD  
• Title name, chapter markers, as well as  
thumbnail picture markers for the Disc  
Navigator, are also copied. However, if  
you copy to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)  
or DVD+R/+RW, only the first  
• Title name and chapter markers are also  
copied, except when copying from a  
finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW.  
40 characters of a name are copied.  
Note  
80  
En  
1 In manual recording mode these equate to MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and backup  
09  
• Thumbnail picture markers and chapter  
markers for the Disc Navigator are  
copied, but their position in the copy may  
be slightly changed from the original.  
• If you want to use a DVD-RW (VR mode)  
disc for the copy, make sure it is  
initialized before you start.  
HOME  
MENU  
• If some part of the title being copied is  
copy-protected, copying will start, but  
the copy-protected portions will not be  
copied.  
2
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home  
Menu.  
ENTER  
3
Select ‘HDD DVD’.  
Using Copy Lists  
HDD DVD  
DVD/CD HDD  
Disc Back-up  
* See also Copyright on page 79.  
At its simplest, a Copy List is just a list of  
HDD or DVD titles that you want to copy.  
When copying HDD titles to DVD, you can,  
however, edit the titles in your copy list,  
erasing chapters you don’t need, or re-  
naming titles, for example. Edits you make to  
titles in the Copy List do not affect the actual  
video content; only the ‘virtual’ content of the  
Copy List. So you can freely erase and modify  
anything in your Copy List safe in the  
knowledge that the actual content is not  
being altered.  
• If this is the first time to create a Copy  
List, skip to step 5 below.  
4
If there is already a Copy List stored in  
the recorder, choose whether to ‘Create  
New Copy List’ or ‘Continue Using  
Previous Copy List’.  
Continue Using Previous Copy List  
Create New Copy List  
Copying from HDD to DVD  
Important  
• If you select Continue Using Previous  
Copy List, skip to step 10 below.  
• Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs  
shown in this manual are for the Taiwan  
and Philippines model.  
• Selecting Create New Copy List will  
erase any Copy List already stored in the  
recorder.  
• The recorder can only store one Copy List  
at a time.  
ENTER  
5
Add titles to the Copy List  
• The Copy List is erased if the Input Line  
System setting is changed (see  
Additional information about the TV  
system settings on page 119).  
(highlight a title and press ENTER to add).  
8
Title  
Copy  
Select Title  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
1 > 2 > 3  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
• Resetting the recorder to its factory  
settings (see Resetting the recorder on  
page 136) will erase the Copy List.  
Back  
Next  
Recent first  
All Genres  
1
Load a recordable DVD.  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
7:00PM  
2h00m(1.0G) 2ch  
• It is possible to complete the following  
steps without having a recordable DVD  
loaded (or having an uninitialized DVD  
loaded); however, the steps are slightly  
different.  
SP  
Free1  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
0.0G  
4.3G  
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are  
highlighted in pink.  
81  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and backup  
09  
There are some restrictions on titles that can  
be added to the Copy List if you are copying  
to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/  
+RW:  
8
To edit a title, highlight it using the  
/ buttons, then press ENTER.  
2
Title  
Copy  
Title Edit  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
1 > 2 > 3  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2c
1
2
Erase  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2c
• When adding titles that contain copy-  
once protected material, the copy-once  
parts will not be added.  
Title Name  
Back  
Next  
Erase Section  
Move  
Preview  
Cancel  
• When adding titles that contain material  
of more than one aspect ratio (screen  
size), each part with a different aspect  
ratio will be added as a separate title if  
high-speed copying is possible.  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(2.0G)  
Copy List Total  
4.3G  
4.3G  
Current DVD Remain  
A menu of editing commands appears:  
1
Depending on the title , high-speed copying  
may not be possible to DVDs.  
Erase – Erase individual titles from the  
Copy List (see Erase on page 69).  
6
Press to display the command  
menu panel.  
Title Name – Name or rename a title in  
the Copy List (see Title Name on  
page 70).  
The command menu panel  
Erase Section – Erase part of a title (see  
Erase Section on page 72).  
8
Title  
Copy  
Select Title  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
1 > 2 > 3  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29 WED 11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
Move – Change the order of titles in the  
Copy List (see Move on page 75).  
Back  
Next  
Recent first  
All Genres  
Preview – Check the content of a title in  
the Copy List.  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
7:00PM  
2h00m(1.0G) 2ch  
Divide – Divide a title in the Copy List  
into two (see Divide on page 73).  
SP  
Free1  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
4.3G  
4.3G  
Combine – Combine two titles in the  
Copy List into one (see Combine on  
page 76).  
7
Select ‘Next’ to move on to the Title  
Edit screen.  
Chapter Edit – Edit chapters within a  
Copy List title (see Chapter Edit on  
page 73):  
Divide – Divide a chapter into two.  
Erase/Move – Erase a chapter/  
Change the chapter order.  
Combine – Combine two chapters into  
one.  
2
Title  
Copy  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
1 > 2 > 3  
Title Edit  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1
2
Back  
Next  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(2.0G)  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
4.3G  
4.3G  
Note  
1 The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for DVD+R/+RW:  
• Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP mode.  
The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for DVD-R/-RW (Video Mode) and DVD+R/+RW:  
• Widescreen titles recorded at low resolution (SEP through LP/MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8  
(Video Mode On)).  
LP/MN9 to MN15 recordings when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off.  
• Dual mono/Bilingual recordings.  
• Combined titles that were originally recorded using different recording modes.  
The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for any types of DVD:  
XP+ titles.  
82  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and backup  
09  
Set Thumbnail – Set the thumbnail  
frame for a title (see Set Thumbnail on  
page 72).  
• Select Finalize if you want to  
automatically finalize a DVD-R/-RW  
(Video mode) or DVD+R after copying.  
Select a title menu style from the  
following screen.  
1
Recording Mode – Set the picture  
quality of the copy (see Recording Mode  
on page 84).  
ENTER  
Dual Mono Audio/Bilingual – Set how  
dual mono/bilingual audio should be  
copied when copying from HDD to  
DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD+R/  
+RW (see Dual Mono Audio/Bilingual on  
page 85).  
11  
copying.  
Select ‘Start Copy’ to start  
Copy  
HDD DVD (Video Mode)  
1 > 2 > 3  
Start Copy  
HDD  
DVD-RW  
Video Mode  
Back  
Recording Mode  
Input Disc Name  
Finalize  
Copy Time 0h 16m  
Cancel – Exit the menu.  
Recording Mode  
Disc Name  
High-Speed  
Off  
Repeat this step for as many titles you have  
that need editing.  
Finalize  
Start Copy  
Copy List Total  
4.3G  
4.3G  
Current DVD Remain  
• If you’re using a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL  
disc and the copy will span both layers,  
the Copy List Total bar will be purple.  
9
Display the command menu  
Select ‘Next’ to proceed.  
panel.  
• The Current DVD Remain bar will be  
half-length if the first layer of a DVD-R DL  
or DVD+R DL disc is already full.  
ENTER  
10  
2
Title  
Copy  
Title Edit  
HDD DVD (Video mode)  
1 > 2 > 3  
Copying from DVD to HDD  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1
2
Back  
Next  
Important  
• The DVD to HDD Copy screen isn’t  
accessible when a finalized Video mode  
DVD-R/-RW or a DVD-Video is loaded. As  
long as the disc is not Copy Guard  
protected, you can still use the One  
Touch Copy function, however (see One  
Touch Copy on page 79).  
11/29Wed 7:00PM 2ch SP  
1h00m(2.0G)  
Copy List Total  
Current DVD Remain  
4.3G  
4.3G  
There are several options available from the  
next screen:  
• The recorder can only store one Copy List  
at a time.  
• Select Recording Mode if you want to  
change the recording quality (see  
Recording Mode on page 84).  
• The Copy List will be erased if:  
– any of the titles on the DVD disc are  
erased or edited.  
– the disc tray is opened.  
– playback is switched between Play List  
and Original.  
– the DVD disc is re-initialized or  
finalized.  
– the recorder is reset to its factory  
settings (see Resetting the recorder on  
page 136).  
• Select Input Disc Name if you want to  
change the disc name. Input a name of  
up to 64 characters for a VR mode disc or  
40 characters for a Video mode disc or  
DVD+R/+RW. (The input method is  
similar to that of naming titles; see Title  
Name on page 70.)  
Note  
83  
En  
1 If a timer recording is scheduled to start during copying, the disc will not be finalized.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and backup  
09  
• It may not be possible to copy from a  
DVD disc that was recorded on a  
different DVD recorder or a PC.  
Repeat this step for as many titles you have  
that need editing.  
ENTER  
HOME  
MENU  
7
Select ‘Next’ from the  
1
Select ‘Copy’ from the Home  
command menu panel to proceed to the  
copy options screen.  
Menu.  
• Select Recording Mode if you want to  
change the recording quality (see  
Recording Mode below).  
ENTER  
2
3
Select ‘DVD/CD HDD’.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Select a Copy List type.  
8
Select ‘Start Copy’ to start  
• Selecting Create New Copy List will  
erase any Copy List already stored in the  
recorder.  
copying.  
Recording Mode  
ENTER  
ENTER  
4
Add titles to the Copy List  
1
Select ‘Recording Mode’ from  
(highlight a title and press ENTER to add).  
Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are  
highlighted in pink.  
the command menu panel.  
ENTER  
2
Select a recording mode for  
ENTER  
the copy.  
5
Select ‘Next’ from the  
1
High-Speed Copy – The Copy List is  
copied at the same recording quality as  
the original.  
command menu panel to proceed to the  
title edit screen.  
2
XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP, MN – The Copy  
ENTER  
List is copied at the specified recording  
quality in real-time. (Note that if you copy  
at a higher quality setting than the  
original, the copy will not be better  
quality than the original.)  
6
Select a title to edit.  
A menu appears of Copy List editing  
commands:  
Erase – Erase individual titles from the  
Copy List (see Erase on page 69).  
If you select MN above, you can also  
Move – Change the order of titles in the  
Copy List (see Move on page 75).  
change the level setting (MN1 to  
3
4
MN32 , LPCM or XP+ ) from the  
Preview – Check the content of a title in  
the Copy List.  
Recording Quality box that appears.  
Cancel – Exit the menu.  
Note  
1 When copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers in the copy may not be in  
exactly the same position as the original.  
2 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)  
or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at  
regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Chapter  
(DVD+R/+RW) on page 114).  
3 When copying to a DVD+R/+RW, MN1 to MN3 and SEP modes are not available.  
4 XP+ mode available only when copying to HDD.  
84  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and backup  
09  
1,2  
Optimized – The recording quality is  
ENTER  
automatically adjusted so that the Copy  
List fits on to the space available on the  
disc. Copying is carried out in real-time.  
2
Select a backup option.  
Start new disc back-up  
Resume writing data  
Erase back-up data  
When you change the recording mode  
setting, you can see how much disc space it  
will require. If this is more than is available,  
it shows up in red and you won’t be able to  
start copying. In this case, either change the  
recording quality, or press RETURN to go  
back to the Copy List screen and erase one  
or more titles from the Copy List.  
There are three backup options:  
Start new disc back-up – Start making  
a backup of a disc.  
Resume writing data – Record the  
backup data already on the HDD to a  
recordable DVD.  
Dual Mono Audio/Bilingual  
Erase back-up data – Erase the backup  
data on the HDD.  
1
Select the title containing the  
audio you want to change.  
3
Load the disc you want to make a  
backup of.  
You can only make backup copies of  
finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW discs,  
finalized DVD+R or DVD+RW discs  
(excluding DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs).  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Dual Mono Audio/  
Bilingual’ from the command menu  
panel.  
Disc Back-up  
ENTER  
No disc.  
3
Select a dual mono audio/  
Please load a disc to be backed-up.  
bilingual option.  
Cancel  
Start  
Using disc backup  
ENTER  
* See also Copyright on page 79.  
4
Select ‘Start’.  
This feature offers a simple way to make a  
backup copy of finalized DVD-R/-RW (Video  
mode) discs or DVD+R/+RW discs. The  
Disc Back-up  
Read from disc and save to HDD.  
Start reading?  
3
data is copied first to the hard disk drive ,  
then on to another recordable DVD disc.  
Cancel  
Start  
HOME  
MENU  
• To see the progress of the backup, press  
DISPLAY.  
1
Select ‘Copy’, then ‘Disc backup’  
from the Home Menu.  
Note  
1 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode)  
or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at  
regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Chapter  
(DVD+R/+RW) on page 114).  
2 Optimized mode only available when copying to DVD. Due to remaining space on the disc or the title that you  
copy, this mode does not always exactly fill a disc.  
3 It is not possible to play this material directly from the HDD.  
85  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and backup  
09  
• You can cancel the backup process by  
pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more  
than one second.  
are using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc  
you can re-initialize it in order to make it  
usable again — see Initializing recordable  
DVD discs on page 49.)  
5
When the data has been copied, take  
out the disc and load a blank* recordable  
DVD.  
* If you’re using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW, the  
disc doesn’t have to be blank, although the  
previous contents of the disc will be erased in  
the backup process.  
7
After the recorder has finished  
recording the backup disc, you can select  
whether to make another backup of the  
same data or exit.  
Disc Back-up  
Disc back-up finished.  
To make another back-up copy, please load  
a recordable disc.  
Disc Back-up  
Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive.  
Please eject the disc and load a  
recordable disc  
Cancel  
Start  
• Select Start to make another backup  
copy or Cancel to finish. If you want to  
make another backup copy, return to  
step 6 above.  
Cancel  
Start  
You can use a DVD-R ver. 2.0, 2.1 or 2.2 disc,  
or DVD-RW ver. 1.1 or ver. 1.2 disc for the  
backup.  
8
If you don’t need to keep the backup  
data on the HDD, you can delete it now.  
Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD;  
select No to keep it (you can delete it later if  
you want to).  
• If you backup a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW,  
you cannot undo the finalization later.  
• Actual recordable capacity of discs vary  
so there may be cases where the  
contents of the disc you’re backing-up  
will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If  
this happens, please try another brand of  
disc.  
Disc Back-up  
The backed-up data is still on the HDD.  
Erasing it will increase the free space  
available. OK to Erase?  
No  
Yes  
• DVD-R/-RW discs can only be backed up  
to DVD-R/-RW discs; DVD+R/+RW  
discs can only be backed up to DVD+R/  
+RW discs.  
• If you decide to leave the backup data on  
the HDD, you can make backup copies  
to recordable DVD discs anytime from  
the Disc Back-up menu.  
6
Select ‘Start’ to start writing the  
backed-up data to the blank disc.  
Disc Back-up  
Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive.  
The disc contents will be overwritten.  
OK to start?  
Cancel  
Start  
• To see the progress of the backup, press  
DISPLAY.  
• You can cancel the backup process by  
pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more  
than one second. However, this will  
make the disc unusable (although if you  
86  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Jukebox  
10  
Chapter 10  
Using the Jukebox  
The Jukebox feature allows you to use the  
recorder’s HDD to store and playback music  
from your CDs. You can also transfer WMA/  
MP3 files stored on CD-R/-RW/-ROM, DVD,  
USB device or PC.  
4
Display the command menu.  
The command menu panel  
Disc Navigator (DVD/CD)  
Track List  
Track 01  
10 Tracks  
Play  
Copying music to the HDD  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Track 02  
Track 03  
Track 04  
Track 05  
Track 06  
Track 07  
Track 08  
CD  
Edit  
The first step is to copy some music to the  
HDD. CD audio, WMA and MP3 files are  
copied at high speed.  
Play Mode  
Usually, each track on a CD or DVD is  
Track 01  
0.04.30 / 1.14.00  
650MB  
(None)  
HDD  
categorized and copied onto the HDD on the  
basis of information on artists and albums.  
Track 03  
Track Repeat  
0.05.30  
10.00.00  
Remain  
100.0  
G
Stereo  
3
1
Note that once copied to the HDD, audio  
tracks cannot be copied to a recordable DVD  
disc.  
ENTER  
5
6
Select ‘Edit’ from the menu.  
Select ‘Copy all to HDD’ from  
ENTER  
Important  
the menu.  
On pressing ENTER all tracks (or files) on the  
CD are copied to the HDD.  
• While copying, no other recorder  
operation is possible.  
• When copying, scheduled timer  
recordings will not start until copying is  
complete.  
• When a folder of WMA/MP3 files is  
selected, you can copy only the files  
contained in the folder by using Copy to  
HDD.  
• Copy protected CDs may not copy  
successfully.  
• You can also copy tracks (or files) by  
selecting Copy > DVD/CD HDD and  
pressing ENTER from the Home Menu.  
• You can also start copying by starting  
playback of the CD/DVD and then  
pressing ONE TOUCH COPY.  
1
Load the CD/DVD you want to copy  
to the HDD.  
2
Select the DVD.  
DVD  
DISC NAVIGATOR  
3
Open the Disc Navigator.  
• To cancel copying press ENTER.  
• If the CD loaded contains both CD audio  
tracks and WMA/MP3 files, the part  
currently selected will copy.  
Note  
1 • Up to 50 000 tracks can be created in the Jukebox. (You can create up to 50 000 artists/albums in total.)  
• Sound quality is not worsened when you copy data from another source.  
• When playing back an album copied from a source whose original audio track plays continuously (such as a  
live recording), there will be a brief pause in sound between tracks.  
• WMA/MP3 files are classified according to the information included in the files. Track names may differ from  
the names of the original files.  
• Depending on the name of the original folder and track, the artist and album under which the folder or track  
is classified may differ.  
87  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Jukebox  
10  
Copying files via USB  
ENTER  
2
Load the next batch of up to 999  
files/99 folders from the connected USB  
device.  
It takes several minutes to reload files.  
Connecting a regular USB device  
You can copy WMA or MP3 files from a  
connected USB device, such as a USB drive,  
to the HDD.  
1
Connect PC  
Using a USB connection, you can copy  
WMA and MP3 files from a PC to the HDD of  
this device. Operations carried out on the PC  
require Windows Media Player 11.  
1
Connect the USB device.  
HOME  
MENU  
2
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home  
Menu.  
3
Important  
ENTER  
• If the PC you are using does not currently  
have Windows Media Player 11 installed,  
you must first install the program and  
make sure it functions correctly before  
connecting the USB cable and  
attempting to use the Connect PC  
function.  
Select ‘Listen to Music from  
USB device’.  
4
5
6
Display the command menu.  
ENTER  
• For more information on Connect PC,  
see Using a PC on page 24.  
Select ‘Edit’ from the menu.  
Select ‘Copy all to HDD’ from  
• You cannot edit or delete albums from  
this device when it is connected to a PC  
via USB. If you wish to edit or delete  
albums via the Jukebox, you must first  
disconnect the USB cable.  
ENTER  
the menu.  
The folders on the USB device will be copied  
to the HDD.  
1
Connect the PC via USB cable.  
• Up to 99 folders/999 files on the USB  
device can be copied/displayed.  
The screen below is displayed. Press ‘’ to  
close the screen.  
• Only the files that have been read can be  
copied. To copy the files that have not  
been read, reload the files (see below).  
• To copy specific folders, select the  
desired folders and select Copy to HDD.  
Reloading files from a USB device  
If you have a USB device with more than  
1000 files and/or 100 folders, you can still  
view all the tracks using the reload function.  
1
Navigate to the last entry in  
the folder list (‘Read next: ...’).  
Note  
88  
En  
1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the Jukebox screen while the recorder is reloading files.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Jukebox  
10  
*Depending on the Windows OS version and  
the Windows Media Player settings, the  
screen shown below may not be displayed.  
6
Open Windows Media Player 11 on  
the PC.  
The device settings screen appears. Click  
‘Cancel’.  
*Depending on the settings for Windows  
Media Player 11, the screen shown below  
may not be displayed.  
HOME  
MENU  
2
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home  
Menu.  
‘Cancel’  
From the PC, in Windows Media Player 11:  
ENTER  
1. Click ‘Sync’.  
3
Select ‘Connect PC’.  
2. Choose the artist, album or song  
you would like to copy, and press the  
right mouse button.  
ENTER  
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’  
3. Click ‘Add to Sync list’.  
4. Click ‘Start Sync’.  
to cancel.  
5
Verify that the import screen is  
displayed on the device.  
If no actions are carried out for 20 minutes,  
the import screen is automatically closed. To  
reopen it, you will have to repeat steps 2  
through 4.  
This begins the synchronization process.  
When finished, the message ‘Synchronized  
to Device’ is displayed in Windows Media  
Player 11.  
Number of copied  
folders  
Number of files  
unable to be copied  
Status  
Connect PC  
Standby  
00000 Folders  
000000 Files  
( 000 error  
( 000 error  
)
)
Exit  
Number of copied files  
‘Start Sync’  
89  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Jukebox  
10  
For more information refer to the Help menu  
of Windows Media Player 11.  
• Up to 50 000 tracks can be included in  
one album. (The total number of tracks  
allowed in Jukebox is 50 000.) Note that  
when there are many tracks contained in  
one album, it may take time to display  
and transfer these tracks.  
Progress Bar  
Connect PC  
Copying  
• Artists, albums and tracks with no set  
name that are transferred from CD/DVD/  
USB are displayed as ‘Unknown Artist’,  
‘Unknown Album’ and ‘Unknown File’ in  
Windows Media Player 11.  
00001 Folders  
000003 Files  
( 000 error  
( 000 error  
)
)
Exit  
• To cancel the synchronization process  
while it is underway, press ENTER on the  
remote control. The Connect PC screen  
is closed.  
• Artists, albums and track names that do  
not conform to the ISO8859-1 standard  
may display differently in Windows  
Media Player 11 and the Jukebox.  
• If synchronization fails, make sure that  
the Pioneer. HDD/DVD-Recorder device  
is selected at the synchronization screen  
of Windows Media Player 11, and try  
again.  
• File whose extensions are not supported  
by the Jukebox (i.e. files that are not  
.mp3 or .wma) cannot be transferred.  
• Files imported to this recorder via  
Connect PC cannot be exported from  
this recorder.  
7
When you have finished copying  
files, close Windows Media Player 11 on  
the PC.  
• Note that no recording functions,  
including timer recordings, will be  
carried out when you are using the  
Connect PC function.  
ENTER  
8
Close the import screen on this  
device.  
• If no actions are carried out for  
20 minutes after copying, the import  
screen is automatically closed.  
Playing music from the  
Jukebox  
Note  
You can select artists, albums or individual  
tracks from the Jukebox to play.  
• When using the sync function of  
Windows Media Player 11, music, artist  
and album folders are created as  
follows:  
HOME  
MENU  
1
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home  
Root  
Menu.  
ENTER  
music1.mp3  
music2.mp3  
Music  
Artist 1  
Album 1  
2
Select a Jukebox option.  
Listen to Music/Edit – Listen to CDs or  
WMA/MP3 files that have been copied to  
the HDD.  
music1.wma  
Album 2  
Album 1  
Listen to Music from USB device –  
Listen to music from an external USB  
device. Proceed to step 4.  
music1.mp3  
Artist 2  
• The above music folder is not displayed.  
90  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Jukebox  
10  
ENTER  
3
Select the artist you want to  
6
Display the command menu.  
play back.  
Jukebox HDD  
Track List  
The screen below shows artists stored on the  
HDD:  
10 Tracks  
ALL  
Play  
1
2
3
4
Track1  
Track2  
Track3  
Track4  
Erase  
Edit  
Track  
Jukebox HDD  
Repeat  
Artist List  
ALL  
10 Artists  
Add to Play List  
Original  
5
Track5  
Track6  
Track7  
Play List Name  
1
2
3
4
Artist1  
Artist2  
Artist3  
Artist4  
6
7
Artist  
Track1  
HDD  
MP3  
8GB  
MENU  
classical  
Original  
Remain  
100.0  
5
6
7
Artist5  
Artist6  
Artist7  
G
Artist1  
HDD  
Total 10  
ENTER  
Remain  
100.0  
G
7
Select ‘Play’ from the menu.  
The album display changes for the selected  
artist when you press ENTER.  
Repeat play  
• This step is for the display mode set to  
Artist. The operation varies when the  
display mode is set to other settings.  
1
Display the command menu  
• To play back all artists, select All and  
during playback.  
proceed to step 6.  
ENTER  
• Press SUBTITLE or ANGLE to change  
the page.  
2
Select ‘Repeat’ from the  
menu.  
• Select Play Mode when audio files  
stored on a USB device are being played  
back (see The Play Mode menu on  
page 58).  
ENTER  
4
Select the album you want to  
play back.  
Press ENTER to change the track display for  
the selected album.  
ENTER  
• To play back all albums, select All and  
proceed to step 6.  
3
Select a repeat function from  
the command menu panel.  
Repeat Artist – Repeats all tracks of an  
artist being played back.  
5
Select the track you want to  
play back.  
• To play back all tracks, select All.  
Repeat Album – Repeats all tracks of an  
album being played back.  
Repeat Track – Repeats the track being  
played back.  
Repeat Off – Cancels repeat playback.  
91  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Jukebox  
10  
Playing your favourite music (Play  
ENTER  
List)  
3
Select a play list (‘Play List 1’  
You can collect and play back only your  
favourite songs stored on the HDD.  
to ‘Play List 4’) you want to play back.  
Creating a play list  
4
5
Display the command menu.  
Select ‘Play’ from the menu.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
1
Select a track you want to add  
to a play list.  
Changing the display style of  
the Jukebox  
2
3
Display the command menu.  
ENTER  
Select ‘Add to Play List’ from  
ENTER  
the menu.  
1
Select an artist/album you  
want to change the display for.  
ENTER  
4
Select a play list (‘Play List 1’  
to ‘Play List 4’) where you want to add  
the selected track.  
• You can add up to 25 songs to a play list.  
2
Display the view options  
panel.  
• You can rename a play list (see Editing  
the HDD Jukebox on page 93).  
Jukebox HDD  
Artist List  
10 Artists  
Display Mode  
Artist1  
Artist2  
Artist3  
Artist4  
Artist  
Playing a play list  
Play List  
Original  
MENU  
Artist5  
Artist6  
Artist7  
1
Display the view options  
Artist1  
HDD  
Total 10  
panel.  
Remain  
100.0  
G
The view options panel  
ENTER  
Jukebox HDD  
Artist List  
10 Artists  
3
Select a view option.  
Display Mode  
Display Mode  
Artist1  
Artist2  
Artist3  
Artist4  
Artist  
Play List  
Original  
By artist – Displays the artists copied  
onto this unit from the earliest date.  
MENU  
Artist5  
Artist6  
By album – Displays the albums of the  
selected artist. When you select All,  
albums of all artist are displayed.  
Artist7  
Artist1  
HDD  
Total 10  
Remain  
100.0  
G
By track – Displays the tracks of the  
selected artist/album. When you select  
All, tracks of the all artist/album are  
displayed.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Play List’.  
92  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Jukebox  
10  
Play List  
Editing the HDD Jukebox  
Original – Displays the settings of  
Display Mode (By artist).  
A number of commands are available for  
editing and changing the playback behavior  
of albums.  
Play List 1 to Play List 4 – Displays the  
tracks added to each play list.  
HOME  
MENU  
Favourites – Displays up to 25 tracks  
you listen to most frequently.  
1
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home  
Menu.  
Copying albums/tracks  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
You can copy the albums stored on the HDD  
to other folders of a different artist on the  
HDD. Also, you can copy the tracks stored  
on the HDD to other albums on the HDD.  
2
3
4
Select ‘Listen to Music/Edit’.  
Select what you want to edit.  
Select an edit function from  
• You cannot copy the albums/tracks  
stored on the HDD to a DVD or a USB  
device.  
the command menu panel.  
HOME  
MENU  
Erase – Deletes the selected artist/  
1
1
Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home  
album/track.  
Menu.  
Edit > Artist name – Enter a name of up  
to 64 characters for the artist. See Title  
Name on page 70 for how to enter  
names.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Listen to Music/Edit’.  
Select an album/track you  
Edit > Album name – Enter a name of  
up to 64 characters for the album. See  
Title Name on page 70 for how to enter  
names.  
ENTER  
3
want to copy.  
Edit > Track name – Enter a name of up  
to 64 characters for the track. See Title  
Name on page 70 for how to enter  
names.  
ENTER  
4
Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Copy Album’ or  
‘Copy Track’ from the command menu.  
Play List name – Enter a name of up to  
12 characters for the Play List. See Title  
Name on page 70 for how to enter  
names.  
ENTER  
5
Select an artist/album you  
want to copy the selected album/track  
to.  
Select New Artist or New Album if you  
want to create a new artist/album. The name  
of an artist/album becomes A_number/  
A_number_F_number.  
ENTER  
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’  
to cancel.  
Note  
93  
En  
1 Some time may be required to erase artists or albums if they include many tracks.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
11  
Chapter 11  
The PhotoViewer  
From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG  
photos and picture files stored on the HDD,  
ENTER  
3
Select the folder containing  
recordable DVD or CD-R/-RW/-ROM, or on a  
1
the files you want to view, copy or edit.  
The first image from the selected folder is  
displayed as thumbnail at the bottom of the  
screen. From the Folder Information column,  
you can change thumbnails via the  
USB-equipped digital camera. You can also  
import files and save them to the recorder’s  
HDD or a DVD-R/-RW disc.  
Important  
REV SCAN/FWD SCAN buttons.  
• Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs shown  
in this manual are for the Taiwan and  
Philippines model.  
Currently selected  
folder in folder list  
PhotoViewer HDD  
Locating JPEG picture files  
Select Folder  
001 Folder1  
002  
003  
004  
005  
Folder2  
Folder3  
Folder4  
Folder5  
HOME  
MENU  
Folder  
1
Select ‘PhotoViewer’ from the  
FOLDER  
MENU  
006 Folder6  
Home Menu.  
007  
008  
Folder7  
Folder8  
HDD  
002 Folder2  
Files  
Folder  
ENTER  
999  
Remain  
100.0  
999 MB  
1/3  
G
2
Select the location of the files  
Pages in  
folder list  
you want to view or edit.  
Folder information  
View/Edit Photos on the HDD  
View Photos on a CD/DVD  
4
Select the file you want to  
View Photos on a USB Device  
Copy Files from a Digital Camera  
view, copy or edit.  
Currently selected  
thumbnail  
View/Edit Photos on the HDD – View  
or edit photos already stored on the  
recorder’s HDD.  
PhotoViewer HDD  
Folder2  
Folder Size 999 MB  
001 PIOR0000  
002 PIOR0001  
003 PIOR0002  
View Photos on a CD/DVD – View  
photos on a Fujicolor CD, CD-ROM,  
CD-R/-RW, or DVD-R/-RW.  
File  
004 PIOR0003  
005 PIOR0004  
FILE  
MENU  
12 Files  
006 PIOR0005  
007 PIOR0006  
008 PIOR0007  
009 PIOR0008  
View Photos on a USB Device – View  
photos on a digital camera (or other USB  
device) connected to the USB port.  
010 PIOR0009  
011 PIOR0010  
HDD  
012 PIOR0011  
Remain  
1/84  
100.0  
G
Copy Files from a Digital Camera –  
Copy all DCF files directly from a  
connected digital camera to a  
recordable DVD-R/-RW.  
Pages in  
file list  
Note  
1 Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc or connected  
USB camera it is still possible to view them all using the Reload function (see Reloading files from a disc or USB  
device on page 96).  
94  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
11  
• The larger the file size, the longer it takes  
the recorder to load the file.  
ENTER  
3
Choose a view option, then  
• You can change folders via the  
REV SCAN/FWD SCAN  
buttons.  
press ENTER.  
The display mode will change to that which  
you have chosen.  
• If you encounter a disc that will not play,  
check that the disc and file formats are  
compatible with this recorder (see JPEG  
file compatibility and PC-created disc  
compatibility on page 11).  
Playing a slideshow  
ENTER  
• The thumbnail of files that cannot be  
1
list.  
Select a folder from the folder  
played is displayed as the  
logo.  
To start the slideshow from the first file in the  
folder, skip to step 3 after choosing the  
desired folder and pressing .  
Changing the display style of  
the PhotoViewer  
You can choose to display photos by  
grouping them by folder, file, or number of  
thumbnails.  
2
Select a thumbnail.  
• Use PREV/NEXT to display the  
previous/next page of thumbnails.  
1
Display the view options  
ENTER  
panel.  
3
Select ‘Start Slideshow’ or  
‘Start Audio Slideshow’ from the menu.  
When Start Audio Slideshow is selected,  
you can enjoy the slideshow while playing  
back music in Jukebox. Press / to  
select the desired play list or Favourites that  
contains the songs you want to play back  
and then press ENTER.  
The view options panel  
PhotoViewer HDD  
Folder2  
Folder Size 999 MB  
PIOR0000  
Display Mode  
PIOR0001  
PIOR0002  
PIOR0003  
PIOR0004  
PIOR0005  
PIOR0006  
PIOR0007  
PIOR0008  
010 PIOR0009  
011 PIOR0010  
012 PIOR0011  
File  
Style  
12 Files  
FILE  
MENU  
For more information on adding music to the  
HDD, see Using the Jukebox on page 87.  
HDD  
• You can also select a file or folder then  
press PLAY to start playing the  
slideshow.  
Remain  
100.0  
1/84  
G
ENTER  
• Use PREV/NEXT to display the  
previous/next picture, or PAUSE to  
pause the slideshow.  
• Depending on the aspect ratio, some  
pictures may be displayed with black  
bars top and bottom, or left and right.  
2
Choose ‘Display Mode’ or  
‘Style’ then press ENTER to see the  
available view options.  
Display Mode – Choose between folder  
and file display modes.  
Style – Choose between displays of 1, 4  
and 12 thumbnails.  
• Large picture files may take a few  
seconds to display. This is normal.  
95  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
11  
STOP  
ENTER  
2
Load the next batch of up to 999  
files/99 folders from the disc or  
connected USB device.  
4
5
Press to return to the thumbnail.  
• You can also use the RETURN button.  
HOME  
MENU  
It will take a moment (at most a few minutes)  
1
Press to exit the PhotoViewer.  
to load in the images.  
Zooming an image  
Importing files to the HDD  
During a slideshow you can zoom in to  
enlarge a portion of the picture by a factor of  
two or four. You can also move the area of  
the picture displayed.  
You can import files and save them to the  
2
HDD from a CD, DVD or a connected USB  
camera. Once on the HDD you can edit and  
organize your pictures and print them out if  
you’ve connected a PictBridge-compatible  
printer.  
ENTER  
1
Press during the slideshow to  
zoom the picture.  
Repeated presses cycle between zoom off,  
2x zoom and 4x zoom. The zoom factor is  
displayed on-screen.  
ENTER  
1
Select the location of folders/  
files you want to import.  
To import a whole folder, select the desired  
folder, press , and skip to step 3 below.  
2
Use to move the zoomed  
area.  
• To import multiple folders, use the Multi-  
Mode; see Selecting multiple files or  
folders on page 97.  
Rotating an image  
You can rotate the displayed picture during a  
slideshow so you can always view pictures the  
right way up, whichever way they were taken.  
2
Select a file to import, then  
press .  
ANGLE  
Press during the slideshow to  
• To import multiple files, use the Multi-  
Mode; see Selecting multiple files or  
folders on page 97.  
rotate the displayed picture clockwise by  
90º.  
Press repeatedly to continue rotating the  
picture in increments of 90º.  
ENTER  
3
Select ‘Copy to HDD’ from the  
menu.  
Reloading files from a disc or  
USB device  
PhotoViewer CD/DVD  
Folder2  
Folder Size 999 MB  
Start Slideshow  
001 PIOR0000  
002 PIOR0001  
If you have a disc with more than 1000 files  
and/or 100 folders, you can still view all the  
images using the reload function.  
Copy all to HDD  
Copy to HDD  
File  
003 PIOR0002  
004 PIOR0003  
005 PIOR0004  
006 PIOR0005  
007 PIOR0006  
008 PIOR0007  
009 PIOR0008  
010 PIOR0009  
011 PIOR0010  
012 PIOR0011  
Print  
Detailed Information
12 Files  
Multi-Mode  
HDD  
1
Navigate to the last entry in  
Remain  
100.0  
1/84  
G
the folder list (‘Read next: ...’).  
Note  
1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter  
the PhotoViewer again, it will resume reloading.)  
2 For files you want to keep permanently, we recommend backing up to DVD-R/-RW.  
96  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
11  
ENTER  
ENTER  
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm and  
4
Select files/folders from the  
copy the folder(s)/file(s), or ‘No’ to  
cancel.  
• The files will be copied to the HDD with  
the same folder structure as the original.  
list.  
An orange check mark box () is shown by  
the item you selected. A blue check mark  
box () appears on the folder select screen  
when files from that folder are selected.  
• Importing to the HDD will not work if  
there is insufficient space on the HDD,  
or if there are already the maximum  
number of files and/or folders on the  
HDD (999 folders/999 files per folder).  
PhotoViewer HDD  
Multi-Mode  
Select Folder  
001 Folder1  
002  
003  
004  
0
Folder2  
Folder3  
Folder4  
Folder5  
Folder  
FOLDER  
MENU  
006 Folder6  
Selecting multiple files or  
folders  
007  
008  
Folder7  
Folder8  
HDD  
002 Folder2  
Files  
Folder  
999  
999 MB  
Remain  
100.0  
1/3  
The Multi-Mode allows you to select multiple  
folders/files at once for importing or editing.  
G
5
6
Display the command menu.  
Select the command you want  
ENTER  
1
Select the folder containing  
ENTER  
the files you want to import.  
to apply to all the selected items.  
2
Display the command menu.  
Copying files to a DVD-R/-RW  
ENTER  
1
Using this feature you can copy all the files  
3
Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the  
(including audio and movie files) stored on a  
connected USB camera to a recordable DVD  
disc.  
menu.  
PhotoViewer HDD  
Select Folder  
001 Folder1  
A slideshow of the files is also recorded on  
the disc as a Video mode title, making it  
possible to view the photos on other DVD  
players/recorders that may not be  
Start Slideshow  
Start Audio Slideshow  
New Folder  
002  
003  
004  
005  
Folder2  
Folder3  
Folder4  
Folder5  
Folder  
Folder Options  
Copy to DVD  
Multi-Mode  
006 Folder6  
007  
008  
Folder7  
Folder8  
compatible with JPEG file playback.  
Once the files have been copied, the disc is  
automatically finalized.  
HDD  
G
002 Folder2  
Files  
Folder  
999  
999 MB  
Remain  
100.0  
1/3  
Note  
1 • There is a limit to the number of files/amount of data that you can copy at one time.  
• Only DCF format files in DCIM folders can be copied to a recordable DVD-R/-RW.  
97  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
11  
(copying selected files doesn’t automatically  
finalize the disc).  
Important  
• Use a blank DVD-R/-RW disc, or one that  
has already been initialized for Video  
mode recording but has nothing yet  
recorded on it. Discs that have already  
been recorded on (as well as CD-R/-RW  
discs) cannot be used.  
Important  
• A maximum of 99 slideshow titles can be  
recorded.  
• One slideshow title can contain up to  
99 files. If there are more files than this in  
the slideshow, multiple slideshows are  
created on the disc.  
• After backing up the pictures in your  
digital camera to DVD, we recommend  
verifying that they have been recorded  
properly before deleting anything from  
the camera.  
• If you erase a slideshow title from a DVD  
the slideshow will become unplayable  
but the free space will not increase.  
1
Press HOME MENU and select  
‘PhotoViewer’ to display the  
PhotoViewer screen.  
1
Load a blank (or unfinalized Video  
mode) DVD-R or DVD-RW disc.  
2
Load a blank (or unrecorded Video  
ENTER  
mode) DVD-R or DVD-RW disc.  
2
Select ‘View/Edit Photos on  
the HDD’ from the menu.  
ENTER  
3
Select ‘Copy Files from a  
ENTER  
Digital Camera’ from the menu.  
3
Select the file(s) or folder(s)  
you want to copy.  
• Copying a folder will copy all the files  
contained in it.  
View/Edit Photos on the HDD  
View Photos on a CD/DVD  
View Photos on a USB Device  
Copy Files from a Digital Camera  
• To copy multiple folders, use the Multi-  
Mode; see Selecting multiple files or  
folders on page 97.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
4
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’  
4
Select ‘Copy to DVD’ from the  
to cancel.  
menu.  
• Note that during copying, any timer  
programmes set to start will not begin,  
and no other operations are possible.  
ENTER  
5
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’  
to cancel.  
Copying selected files to a  
DVD-R/-RW  
• Folder names on the disc will be  
number PIONR. File names will be  
PHOT number.  
This feature allows you just to copy some of  
the files stored on HDD to a DVD.  
• Note that during copying, any timer  
programmes set to start will not begin,  
and no other operation is possible.  
A slideshow of the files is also recorded on  
the disc as a Video mode title, making it  
possible to view the photos on other DVD  
players/recorders that may not be  
• While ‘Cancel’ is displayed, you can  
press ENTER to cancel.  
compatible with JPEG file playback. Note  
however that you may need to finalize the  
disc before it will play on another DVD player  
98  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
11  
Editing files on the HDD  
ENTER  
3
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder  
There are a number of commands you can  
use to edit and organize your pictures stored  
on the HDD.  
Options’.  
PhotoViewer HDD  
Folder2  
Folder Size 999 MB  
Start Slideshow  
Creating a new folder  
001 PIOR0000  
002 PIOR0001  
003 PIOR0002  
004 PIOR0003  
005 PIOR0004  
006 PIOR0005  
007 PIOR0006  
008 PIOR0007  
009 PIOR0008  
010 PIOR0009  
011 PIOR0010  
012 PIOR0011  
Start Audio Slideshow  
File Options  
Print  
File  
Copy to DVD  
12 Files  
Detailed Information  
Multi-Mode  
1
From the folder list, display  
the menu.  
HDD  
Remain  
1/84  
100.0  
G
ENTER  
2
Select ‘New Folder’.  
The folder appears at the bottom of the folder  
list with the name F_number.  
ENTER  
4
Select ‘Erase’ or ‘Erase Folder’.  
PhotoViewer HDD  
Select Folder  
PhotoViewer HDD  
Folder2  
Folder Size 999 MB  
001 Folder1  
Start Slideshow  
001 PIOR0000  
Erase  
Copy  
002  
003  
004  
005  
Folder2  
Folder3  
Folder4  
Folder5  
Start Audio Slideshow  
New Folder  
002 PIOR0001  
003 PIOR0002  
004 PIOR0003  
005 PIOR0004  
006 PIOR0005  
007 PIOR0006  
008 PIOR0007  
009 PIOR0008  
010 PIOR0009  
011 PIOR0010  
012 PIOR0011  
Folder  
File  
Rename File  
Folder Options  
Lock  
Copy to DVD  
Multi-Mode  
12 Files  
006 Folder6  
007  
008  
Folder7  
Folder8  
Cancel  
HDD  
002 Folder2  
Files  
Folder  
HDD  
999  
999 MB  
Remain  
100.0  
Remain  
100.0  
1/3  
1/84  
G
G
• There can be up to 999 folders on the  
HDD.  
ENTER  
5
to cancel.  
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’  
Erasing a file or folder  
• You can also erase a file or folder by  
pressing CLEAR when the file or folder is  
highlighted. Press ENTER to confirm.  
1
Select the file(s) or folder(s)  
you want to erase.  
Copying files  
• To erase multiple files or folders, use the  
Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files  
or folders on page 97.  
1
Select the file(s) or folder(s)  
• Erasing a folder will erase all the files  
contained in it. Please be careful!  
you want to copy.  
• Copying a folder will copy all the files  
contained in it.  
• You can’t erase files that have been  
locked.  
• To copy multiple files or folders, use the  
Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files  
or folders on page 97.  
• Folders containing locked files can’t be  
erased. Unlocked files in the folder,  
however, will be erased.  
2
Display the command menu.  
2
Display the command menu.  
99  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
11  
ENTER  
ENTER  
3
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder  
4
Select ‘Rename File’ or  
Options’.  
‘Rename Folder’.  
PhotoViewer HDD  
Folder2  
ENTER  
Folder Size 999 MB  
4
Select ‘Copy’ or ‘Copy Folder  
001 PIOR0000  
002 PIOR0001  
003 PIOR0002  
Erase  
Copy  
Contents’.  
File  
Rename File  
004 PIOR0003  
005 PIOR0004  
Lock  
PhotoViewer HDD  
Folder2  
12 Files  
006 PIOR0005  
007 PIOR0006  
008 PIOR0007  
009 PIOR0008  
010 PIOR0009  
011 PIOR0010  
012 PIOR0011  
Folder Size 999 MB  
Cancel  
001 PIOR0000  
002 PIOR0001  
003 PIOR0002  
004 PIOR0003  
005 PIOR0004  
006 PIOR0005  
007 PIOR0006  
008 PIOR0007  
009 PIOR0008  
010 PIOR0009  
011 PIOR0010  
012 PIOR0011  
Erase  
Copy  
File  
HDD  
Rename File  
Remain  
100.0  
1/84  
Lock  
G
12 Files  
5
Enter a new name for the file/folder.  
File names or Folder names can be up to 64  
characters long.  
Cancel  
HDD  
Remain  
1/84  
100.0  
G
See Using the remote key shortcuts to input  
a name and Using a USB keyboard to enter a  
name on page 71 for how to enter a name.  
ENTER  
5
Select a folder to copy the  
folder(s)/file(s) to.  
Locking/Unlocking files  
Locking files will protect them from  
accidental erasure and prevent them from  
being renamed.  
ENTER  
6
Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’  
to cancel.  
Use the same process to both lock and  
unlock files. Locked files are displayed in the  
PhotoViewer with a padlock icon.  
• Copying to the HDD will not work if there  
is insufficient space on the HDD; if there  
are already the maximum number of  
files and/or folders on the HDD.  
1
Select the file(s) you want to  
Naming files and folders  
lock (or unlock).  
• To lock/unlock multiple files or folders,  
use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting  
multiple files or folders on page 97.  
1
Select the file or folder you  
want to rename.  
You can’t rename files that have been locked.  
2
3
Display the command menu.  
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder  
2
Display the command menu.  
Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Options’.  
3
Options’.  
100  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The PhotoViewer  
11  
ENTER  
4
Select ‘Lock’ or ‘Lock Folder  
2
3
Display the command menu.  
Select ‘Print’ from the menu.  
Contents’.  
ENTER  
PhotoViewer HDD  
Folder2  
Folder Size 999 MB  
001 PIOR0000  
002 PIOR0001  
003 PIOR0002  
004 PIOR0003  
005 PIOR0004  
006 PIOR0005  
007 PIOR0006  
008 PIOR0007  
009 PIOR0008  
010 PIOR0009  
011 PIOR0010  
012 PIOR0011  
Erase  
Copy  
PhotoViewer HDD  
Folder2  
File  
Folder Size 999 MB  
Start Slideshow  
Rename File  
Lock  
001 PIOR0000  
12 Files  
002 PIOR0001  
003 PIOR0002  
004 PIOR0003  
005 PIOR0004  
006 PIOR0005  
007 PIOR0006  
008 PIOR0007  
009 PIOR0008  
010 PIOR0009  
011 PIOR0010  
012 PIOR0011  
Start Audio Slideshow  
File Options  
Print  
File  
Cancel  
Copy to DVD  
12 Files  
Detailed Information  
Multi-Mode  
HDD  
Remain  
100.0  
1/84  
G
HDD  
Locked files are shown with a padlock icon  
next to them. To remove all locks within a  
given folder, choose ‘Folder Option’ >  
‘Unlock Folder Contents’.  
Remain  
100.0  
1/84  
G
ENTER  
4
Select ‘Start’ to confirm or  
To view detailed information  
This feature allows you to check the settings  
of the camera from which you imported the  
photos.  
‘Cancel’ to cancel.  
• Once printing has started, you can  
cancel by pressing ENTER.  
Tip  
1
Choose the file for which you would  
like to see detailed information.  
Choose ‘Detailed Information’.  
• Paper size and layout can be set; the  
options available depend on your printer  
— check the printer manual for details.  
2
When no detailed information is available,  
nothing is displayed.  
• This recorder may not work correctly  
with all printers.  
Printing files  
Connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer  
to the USB port will enable you to print out  
1
picture files stored on the HDD, a CD/DVD  
or directly from a digital camera.  
Make sure that the printer (and your digital  
camera if you are using that as a source) is  
connected to the recorder before starting.  
1
Select the file(s) you want to  
print.  
• To print multiple files, use the Multi-  
Mode; see Selecting multiple files or  
folders on page 97.  
Note  
101  
En  
1 Picture files should be standard DCF format. Non-standard files may not print properly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Disc Setup menu  
12  
Chapter 12  
The Disc Setup menu  
From the Disc Setup menu you can name  
discs, lock the contents to prevent  
accidental recording and erasure, initialize  
and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is  
accessed from the Home menu.  
Lock Disc  
DVD (VR) DVD-RAM  
• Default setting: Off  
Locking the disc will prevent accidental  
recording, editing or erasing of the disc.  
Basic settings  
Important  
Input Disc Name  
• A locked disc can still be initialized  
(which will completely erase the disc).  
DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM  
HOME  
MENU  
When you initialize a disc for recording, the  
recorder automatically assigns a name for  
the disc ranging from DISC 1 to DISC 99. You  
can use the Input Disc Name function to  
change the default disc name to something  
more descriptive. This name appears when  
you load the disc and when you display disc  
information on-screen.  
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the  
Home Menu.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Lock Disc’  
then ‘On’ or ‘Off’.  
Disc Setup  
On  
Off  
Basic  
Input Disc Name  
HOME  
MENU  
Initialize  
Finalize  
Lock Disc  
DVD-RW Auto Init.  
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the  
Optimize HDD  
Home Menu.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Input Disc  
Set to On to prevent accidental recording,  
editing or erasing of the disc loaded. If you  
need to unlock the disc to make edits, select  
Off.  
Name’ > ‘Next Screen’.  
Disc Setup  
Input Disc Name  
Lock Disc  
Next Screen  
Basic  
Initialize  
Finalize  
DVD-RW Auto Init.  
Optimize HDD  
DVD-RW Auto Initialize  
DVD-RW  
• Default setting: VR Mode  
Initialization mode is automatically carried  
out when you insert a blank DVD-RW. You  
must set the desired initialization mode  
before inserting a disc.  
ENTER  
3
Input a name for the disc.  
The disc name can be up to 64 characters  
long for a VR mode disc, or 40 for a Video  
mode discs and DVD+R/+RW.  
See DVD-RW Auto Initialize on page 50 for  
detailed instructions.  
• See Title Name on page 70 for more on  
navigating the input screen.  
102  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Disc Setup menu  
Initialize settings  
12  
Undo Finalize  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R DVD-RW  
DVD+RW DVD-RAM  
You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW  
discs recorded on this recorder in Video  
mode. You need to do this if you want to  
record more material or edit material already  
on the disc.  
You can initialize a recordable DVD-R/-RW  
disc for either VR mode or Video mode  
recording.  
The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc,  
it will be automatically initialized for  
recording according to the DVD-RW Auto  
Init. setting in the Disc Setup menu (see  
page 50).  
You can also undo the finalization of VR  
mode discs which have been finalized on  
other DVD recorders. If when you load a disc  
the message This disc cannot be recorded.  
Undo the finalization. is displayed, use this  
command to be able to record on the disc  
using this recorder.  
New DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode  
recording when you load them, but it is also  
possible to initialize them for VR mode  
1
recording.  
HOME  
MENU  
DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be  
initialized as a way of erasing the entire disc.  
When initializing a DVD-RAM disc, select VR  
mode.  
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the  
Home Menu.  
ENTER  
See Initializing recordable DVD discs on  
page 49 for detailed instructions.  
2
Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Undo  
Finalize’ then ‘Start’.  
Finalize settings  
Optimize HDD  
HDD  
Finalize  
DVD-R DVD-RW  
DVD+R DVD+RW  
As you record, erase and edit recordings, the  
HDD file system gradually becomes  
fragmented. Periodically, the HDD will need  
optimizing to ‘clean up’ all the fragmented  
files.  
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so  
that the disc can be played on a regular DVD  
player or computer equipped with a suitable  
DVD-ROM drive.  
When the HDD needs optimizing the  
recorder will automatically display a  
message recommending optimization.  
It is also possible to finalize DVD+RW discs.  
This is only necessary if you want to a player  
to display a title menu for the disc.  
See Playing your recordings on other DVD  
players on page 48 for detailed instructions.  
Important  
• Optimizing the HDD can take as long as  
eight hours. During optimization,  
playback and recording are not possible.  
• Cancelling optimization mid-way does  
not undo the optimization already done,  
so the HDD will be partly optimized.  
Note  
1 Once initialized for VR mode recording it is not possible to re-initialize the disc for Video mode recording. Also,  
once recorded in Video mode, the disc cannot be re-initialized for VR mode recording.  
103  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Disc Setup menu  
12  
HOME  
MENU  
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the  
Home Menu.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Optimize HDD’ then  
‘Start’.  
Disc Setup  
Start  
Basic  
Optimize HDD  
Initialize  
Finalize  
Optimize HDD  
A progress bar indicates how long there is  
left to go. If no actions are carried out for  
more than 20 minutes after the optimization  
process is completed, the unit turns itself  
off.  
Initialize HDD  
HDD  
When your HDD/DVD recorder is working  
without a problem this option is not visible in  
the Disc Setup menu. However, if the HDD  
file system becomes corrupted for some  
reason, you can initialize the HDD to fix the  
problem. Note that initializing the HDD will  
erase all the data on it.  
HOME  
MENU  
1
Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the  
Home Menu.  
ENTER  
2
Select ‘Initialize HDD’ then  
‘Start’.  
Disc Setup  
Start  
Basic  
Initialize HDD  
Initialize  
Finalize  
InitializeHDD
104  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Video Adjust menu  
13  
Chapter 13  
The Video Adjust menu  
Using the Video Adjust menu you can set up  
the picture quality for the built-in tuner and  
external inputs, for disc playback, and for  
recording.  
There are six presets available:  
Tuner – suitable for general TV  
broadcasts  
VCR – suitable for video cassettes  
DTV/LDP – suitable for digital  
broadcasts and Laserdiscs  
Setting the picture quality  
for TV and external inputs  
Memory1 – user preset 1  
Memory2 – user preset 2  
Memory3 – user preset 3  
Picture Creation lets you choose a set of  
picture quality settings for the built-in TV  
tuner and for each external input. There are  
several preset settings that suit various  
sources, or you can create up to three of your  
own sets.  
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual  
settings for the current preset (Tuner, VCR  
or DTV/LDP).  
Creating your own set  
There are three user presets in which you  
can save your own set of picture quality  
settings.  
Important  
• Unless otherwise stated, the OSDs shown  
in this manual are for the Taiwan and  
Philippines model.  
1
Follow Choosing a preset above and  
select one of the user presets (Memory 1,  
2 or 3).  
Choosing a preset  
HOME  
MENU  
ENTER  
1
With the recorder stopped, press  
2
Select ‘Detailed Settings’.  
to display the Home Menu.  
2ch  
Memory1  
ENTER  
Detailed Settings  
2
3
Select ‘Video Adjust’.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Select a preset.  
3
Select the setting you want to  
adjust.  
2ch  
Tuner  
Memory1  
2ch  
Detailed Settings  
Prog. Motion  
PureCinma  
3-D Y/C  
YNR  
Motion  
Still  
• Use the INPUT SELECT button to switch  
between the built-in TV tuner and the  
external inputs.  
Auto  
Motion  
Off  
Still  
Max  
Max  
Max  
CNR  
Off  
• Use the PREV/NEXT buttons to  
change the channel of the built-in TV  
tuner.  
Detail  
Off  
White AGC  
Off  
105  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Video Adjust menu  
13  
You can adjust the following settings:  
Setting the picture quality  
for disc playback  
Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and  
still picture quality when video output is  
set to progressive.  
This setting determines how the picture will  
look when playing discs.  
PureCinema – This setting optimizes the  
picture for film material when the video  
output is set to progressive. Usually set  
to Auto; but try switching to Off if the  
picture appears unnatural.  
Choosing a preset  
HOME  
MENU  
1
With a disc playing (or paused),  
3-D Y/C – Adjusts the brightness/colour  
separation.  
press to display the Home Menu.  
YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise  
reduction (NR) applied to the  
Y (brightness) component.  
ENTER  
2
3
Select ‘Video Adjust’.  
Select a setting.  
CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise  
reduction (NR) applied to the C (colour)  
component.  
ENTER  
Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges  
appear.  
TV  
Detailed Settings  
White AGC – Turn on for automatic  
white level adjustment.  
There are six presets available:  
White Level – Adjusts the intensity of  
white.  
TV – suitable for LCD and cathode-ray  
tube TVs  
Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of  
black.  
PDP – suitable for plasma display  
screens  
Black Setup – Corrects the standard  
reference black level (525 Input Line  
System only).  
Professional – suitable for professional  
monitors  
Memory1 – user preset 1  
Memory2 – user preset 2  
Memory3 – user preset 3  
Hue – Adjusts overall balance between  
red and green.  
Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the  
colours appear.  
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual  
settings for the current preset (TV, PDP or  
Professional).  
ENTER  
4
Adjust the currently selected  
Creating your own set  
setting.  
There are three user presets in which you  
can save your own set of picture quality  
settings for disc playback.  
HOME  
MENU  
5
Press to exit.  
You can now use the preset for any other  
input or the built-in TV tuner.  
1
Follow Choosing a preset above and  
select one of the user presets (Memory 1,  
2 or 3).  
Tip  
• To see more of the picture as you adjust  
different settings, press ENTER after  
selecting the setting you want to adjust.  
106  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Video Adjust menu  
13  
2
Move the cursor down and select  
MNR – Adjusts the amount of noise  
reduction (NR) applied to the mosquito  
noise (artefacts visible around the edges  
of an image, caused by MPEG  
compression).  
‘Detailed Settings’.  
Memory1  
Detailed Settings  
Sharpness High – Adjusts the  
sharpness of the high-frequency  
(detailed) elements in the picture.  
3
Select the picture quality setting you  
want to adjust.  
Sharpness Mid – Adjusts the sharpness  
of the mid-frequency (less detailed)  
elements in the picture.  
Memory1  
Prog. Motion  
PureCinma  
Motion  
Still  
Auto1  
On  
Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges  
appear.  
Subtitle Adjust  
YNR  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Max  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
White Level – Adjusts the intensity of  
white.  
CNR  
BNR  
MNR  
Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of  
black.  
You can adjust the following settings:  
Black Setup – Corrects the standard  
reference black level. The Black Setup  
setting is only valid for NTSC video and  
S-Video output signals.  
Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and  
still picture quality when video output is  
set to progressive. (Prog. Motion is  
ineffective when PureCinema is On.)  
Gamma Correction – Adjusts the  
brightness of darker images.  
PureCinema – This setting optimizes the  
picture for film material when the video  
output is set to progressive. Usually set  
to Auto 1 but try switching to Auto 2,  
On or Off if the picture appears  
unnatural.  
Hue – Adjusts overall balance between  
red and green.  
Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the  
colours appear.  
Chroma Delay – Adjust to correct the  
gap between the Y and C components in  
the video signal.  
Subtitle Adjust – When the video output  
is set to progressive scan, it’s possible  
that the subtitles in some movies will  
disappear unnaturally. In this case  
select the On setting.  
4
Use the / buttons to adjust the  
currently selected picture quality setting.  
5
When you have all the settings as you  
want them, press HOME MENU to exit.  
YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise  
reduction (NR) applied to the  
Y (brightness) component.  
Tip  
CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise  
reduction (NR) applied to the C (colour)  
component.  
• To see more of the picture as you adjust  
different settings, press ENTER after  
selecting the setting you want to adjust.  
BNR – Adjusts the amount of noise  
reduction (NR) applied to the block noise  
(artefacts visible in areas of flat colour,  
caused by MPEG compression).  
107  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
14  
Chapter 14  
The Initial Setup menu  
Using the Initial Setup menu  
The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture,  
language and so on.  
Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback and  
recording these settings are grayed out in the Initial Setup menu.  
Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of  
inactivity.  
Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial Setup’.  
In the table below, the default option is marked with a •.  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Basic  
Clock Setting  
Auto  
Set the channel that broadcasts a clock signal and  
the clock will be set automatically.  
Manual •  
If there is no channel that broadcasts a clock signal  
in your area, you can set the time and date manually.  
Display  
Set preferences for time and date display format.  
The clock must be set in order to use timer recording.  
Input Line System  
525 System  
Use for NTSC or PAL-60 recording from an external  
input.  
625 System  
Use for standard PAL or SECAM recording.  
Taiwan and Philippines model: Default setting is 525 System. Other: Default setting is 625 System.  
See also About the input line system on page 119 for more information on this setting.  
Power Save  
(except Taiwan and  
Philippines model)  
On  
No antenna input signals are passed through to the  
outputs when the recorder is in standby.  
Off •  
When the recorder is in standby, all signals arriving  
at the antenna inputs are passed along to the  
outputs.  
HELP Setting  
On •  
Off  
Switches on the automatic Help screens for GUI  
displays.  
Switches off the automatic Help screens for GUI  
displays. (Press HELP on the remote to manually  
display the Help screen.)  
Setup Navigator  
Start  
Select to start the Setup Navigator. See also  
Switching on and setting up on page 29.  
108  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
14  
Setting  
Tuner  
Options  
Explanation  
Auto Channel  
Setting  
(Taiwan and  
Antenna •  
Cable  
Select if you receive channels from an antenna. It  
takes a few moments for the auto tuning to complete.  
Select if you receive channels via cable. It takes a few  
moments for the auto tuning to complete.  
Philippines model)  
Auto Channel  
Setting  
(Other)  
Next Screen  
Proceed to the next screen, select your country, then  
wait for automatic tuning to complete. The channel  
mapping screen should appear when the recorder is  
set up. Press ENTER to exit this screen.  
Manual CH Setting Next Screen  
Proceed to the next screen if you need to adjust any  
of the settings made by auto tuning. Select your  
country, then proceed to the manual channel setting  
screen:  
• Change channel presets using the PREV/  
NEXT buttons.  
To skip the displayed channel (because there is no  
station assigned to that channel), change the Skip  
setting to On.  
• Set the CH System setting to match the channel  
system of your country or region (except Taiwan and  
Philippines model).  
• Set the Channel setting to the channel you want to  
assign to the current channel preset (except Taiwan  
and Philippines model).  
To manually fine tune the channel, change the AFT  
setting to Off then adjust the Level setting.  
• Set the Sound System setting to match the sound  
system of your region (except Taiwan and Philippines  
model).  
• The Name field allows you to input a name of up to  
five characters for the current channel preset (except  
Taiwan and Philippines model).  
Channel Swapping Next Screen  
(except Taiwan and  
Philippines model)  
Proceed to the next screen to swap channel  
assignments of different presets so that you can  
group together presets that naturally go together.  
Select two presets to swap then press ENTER.  
G-Code CH Setting Next Screen  
Proceed to the next screen to assign channel  
numbers to the guide channels as necessary. Look in  
your TV guide to see which channel numbers should  
be assigned to which guide channels. Press ENTER  
when your done to leave this screen.  
109  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
14  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Video In/Out  
Input Colour  
System  
Next Screen  
Proceed to the next screen to set the input colour  
system for the external input and the built-in TV tuner.  
Use the CH +/– buttons to change the preset. On the  
default Auto setting the recorder can generally  
correctly detect whether the input signal is PAL,  
SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or PAL-60, but in some cases you  
may have to set it manually if the picture is displayed  
incorrectly.  
See also About the input colour system on page 119 for more information on this setting.  
Component Video Interlace •  
Out  
Select if your monitor/TV is not compatible with  
progressive-scan video.  
Progressive  
Select if your monitor/TV is progressive-scan  
compatible. Check the operating instructions that  
came with your monitor/TV if you’re not sure.  
If your TV is incompatible with progressive scan video and you select Progressive, you will not be able to see any  
picture at all. In this case, press OPEN/CLOSE while holding down the (Stop) button on the front panel to  
switch to Interlace (this also switches Screen Resolution on page 116 to the default setting).  
NTSC on PAL TV  
On  
NTSC discs will play correctly on PAL-only TVs.  
Use if your TV is already NTSC-compatible.  
Off •  
Many recent PAL TVs are compatible with NTSC input and so this setting can be switched off. Check the operating  
instructions that came with your TV. See also About NTSC on PAL TV on page 119 for related information.  
Audio In  
NICAM Select  
NICAM •  
Record the NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast.  
(except Taiwan and  
Philippines model)  
Regular Audio  
Record the non-NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast.  
(You can still switch the audio to record using the  
AUDIO button before recording.)  
Tuner Level  
Normal •  
Standard setting.  
(except Taiwan and  
Philippines model)  
Compression  
Use if the audio level from the built-in tuner is  
excessive, causing distortion.  
External Audio  
Stereo •  
Select if the audio from the currently selected  
external input is standard stereo.  
Dual Mono/  
Bilingual  
Select if each channel carries a separate soundtrack.  
When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder  
whether the audio is stereo or dual mono/bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here.  
110  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
14  
Setting  
Options  
L •  
Explanation  
Dual Mono  
Recording  
(Taiwan and  
Philippines model)  
Select to record the left channel of an external dual  
mono source when recording to DVD in Video mode,  
to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video  
Mode On, or in LPCM mode.  
R
As above, but for right channel recording.  
When recording dual mono audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording  
Format set to Video Mode Off (except in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the  
one you want on playback.  
Bilingual Recording A/L •  
(Other)  
Record the left (A) channel of a bilingual source  
when recording to HDD with HDD Recording Format  
set to Video Mode On, to DVD in Video mode or in  
LPCM mode, from an external source.  
B/R  
As above, but for right (B) channel recording.  
When recording bilingual audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording Format  
set to Video Mode Off (except in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the one you  
want on playback.  
DV Input  
Stereo 1 •  
Select to use the ‘live’ audio track (recorded during  
the video shoot) from a camcorder that supports two  
stereo audio tracks.  
Stereo 2  
Mix  
Select to use the overdubbed audio track from a  
camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks.  
Select one of the three settings to use a mix of the  
two stereo audio tracks.  
Audio Out  
Dolby Digital Out  
Dolby Digital •  
Output a Dolby Digital signal when a Dolby Digital  
source is being played.  
Dolby Digital Convert Dolby Digital sources to Linear PCM output.  
PCM  
On •  
Off  
Use if your connected equipment doesn’t have a  
Dolby Digital decoder.  
DTS Out  
Output a DTS signal when a DTS source is being  
played.  
Switch off the digital output when a DTS source is  
being played. Use when your connected equipment  
doesn’t have a DTS decoder. In this case, use the  
analog audio outputs.  
96 kHz PCM Out  
96 kHz   
48 kHz •  
Convert 96 kHz digital audio sources to 48 kHz  
output. Use if your connected equipment doesn’t  
support 96 kHz sampling rate.  
96 kHz  
Output 96 kHz digital audio when a 96 kHz source is  
being played.  
111  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
14  
Setting  
Options  
MPEG  
Explanation  
MPEG Out  
Output an MPEG audio signal when a source using  
MPEG audio is being played.  
MPEG PCM •  
Convert sources with MPEG audio to Linear PCM  
output. Use if your connected equipment doesn’t  
have an MPEG audio decoder.  
Audio DRC  
On  
Switches on Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control).  
Use when listening to Dolby Digital material at low  
volume.  
Off •  
Switches off Audio DRC.  
Audio DRC is not effective when listening via the digital output when the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to Dolby  
Digital.  
Language  
OSD Language  
Sets the language of the on-screen displays to  
Chinese.  
(Taiwan and  
Philippines model)  
English •  
(Other)  
Sets the language of the on-screen displays to  
English.  
available languages Choose from the languages displayed for the on-  
screen displays.  
Audio Language  
Chinese •  
(Taiwan and  
Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video  
playback to Chinese.  
Philippines model)  
English •  
(Other)  
Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video  
playback to English.  
available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the  
default audio language for DVD-Video playback.  
Other  
Select to set the default audio language to  
something other than the ones listed. See Selecting  
other languages for language options on page 120.  
Discs do not necessarily have audio in your selected language. Also, some discs override the Audio Language  
preference.  
112  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
14  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Subtitle Language Chinese •  
Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video  
playback to Chinese.  
(Taiwan and  
Philippines model)  
English •  
(Other)  
Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video  
playback to English.  
available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the  
default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback.  
Other  
Select to set the default subtitle language to  
something other than the ones listed. See Selecting  
other languages for language options on page 120.  
Discs do not necessarily have subtitles in your selected menu language. Also, some discs override the Subtitle  
Language preference.  
Auto Language  
On •  
On this setting:  
• DVD-Video discs whose main audio track is in your  
default language will play using that language,  
without subtitles.  
• Discs whose main audio track is not in your default  
language but that have a subtitle track in your default  
language will play the original audio track with  
subtitles.  
Off  
Select to play DVD-Video discs according to your  
audio and subtitle language preferences.  
For Auto Language to be effective, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language options must be set to the same  
language.  
DVD Menu  
Language  
w/Subtitle  
Language •  
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to the same  
as that set for the subtitle language.  
English  
Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to English.  
available languages Choose from the displayed languages to set the  
default language for DVD-Video menus.  
Other  
Select to set the DVD menu language to something  
other than the ones listed. See Selecting other  
languages for language options on page 120.  
Discs do not necessarily have menus in your selected menu language.  
Subtitle Display  
On •  
Select to have discs display subtitles according to  
your Subtitle Language and Auto Language  
preferences.  
Off  
Select to switch off subtitle display.  
Assist Subtitle  
Select to display special additional assistive subtitles,  
where available.  
Some discs may override these settings.  
113  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
14  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Recording  
Manual Recording On (go to setup) All the standard recording modes, plus MN1 to  
MN32, LPCM and XP+ modes can be set.  
Off •  
Just the standard recording modes (XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP  
and SEP) can be set.  
See also Manual recording modes on page 122 for detailed information on manual recording levels.  
Optimized Rec  
On  
The recording quality of timer recordings is  
automatically adjusted to fit on to the selected media  
if it will not fit at the selected quality setting. If the  
recording will not fit even at MN1 (MN4 for DVD+R/  
+RW), then the recording will be made to the HDD in  
the original quality selected.  
Off •  
When a timer recording is set that won’t fit on to the  
selected media, the recording starts but is cut off  
when no more recording is possible.  
Optimized Rec will only compensate for the next scheduled timer recording if more than one is set.  
Set Thumbnail  
0 seconds •  
30 seconds  
3 minutes  
On •  
Sets the default thumbnail picture in the Disc  
Navigator to the first frame of the title.  
Sets the default thumbnail picture to 30 seconds into  
the title.  
Sets the default thumbnail picture to three minutes  
into the title.  
Auto Chapter  
(HDD/VR)  
When recording to the HDD or in VR mode to a DVD,  
chapter marks are added at the black screen  
between commercials and main programming.  
When recording in DV, chapter marks can be  
changed by date/time.  
Off  
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.  
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.  
Auto Chapter  
(Video)  
No Separation  
10 minutes •  
When recording in Video mode, chapter markers are  
inserted every 10 minutes.  
15 minutes  
Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.  
This settings applies to recording or real-time copying to Video mode DVD-R/-RW discs.  
Auto Chapter  
(DVD+R/+RW)  
No Separation  
10 minutes •  
Automatic chapter marking is switched off.  
When recording in DVD+R/+RW, chapter markers  
are inserted every 10 minutes.  
15 minutes  
Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.  
This settings applies to recording or real-time copying to DVD+R/+RW discs.  
114  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
14  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
HDD Recording  
Format  
Video Mode Off Recordings made to the HDD are made in VR mode.  
Use this setting if you don’t need to transfer the  
recording later to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or  
DVD+R/+RW.  
Video Mode On • Recordings made to the HDD are compatible with  
Video mode recordings. This setting is convenient if  
you want to transfer the recording to a DVD-R/-RW  
(Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW as high-speed copy  
can be used.  
• Taiwan and Philippines model: When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to  
record when recording a broadcast with a SAP channel. On the Video Mode Off setting, both channels will be  
recorded and you can switch between them on playback. See also Dual Mono Recording on page 111.  
• Other: When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to record when recording a  
bilingual broadcast. On the Video Mode Off setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between  
them on playback. See also Bilingual Recording on page 111.  
• When the recording mode is set to XP+, you cannot change HDD Recording Format.  
Playback  
TV Screen Size  
4:3 (Letter Box)  
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the  
letter box format presentation for widescreen  
material.  
4:3 (Pan & Scan)  
16:9 •  
Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the  
pan and scan presentation for widescreen material.  
Select if you have a widescreen 16:9 TV. Your TV  
settings determine how 4:3 material will look.  
Selecting 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) does not guarantee that all video material will be presented in that  
format as some discs override this setting.  
Still Picture  
Field  
Produces a stable, generally shake-free image.  
Produces sharp image, but may be prone to shake.  
Frame  
Auto •  
Generates a generally less sharp but more stable still  
image.  
Seamless Playback On  
Off •  
Playback is smooth, but with a trade-off against the  
accuracy of the edit points.  
You may notice momentary interruption at edited  
points during playback of a VR mode Play List.  
This setting applies to HDD, DVD-R/-RW (VR) and DVD-RAM playback.  
115  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
14  
Setting  
Options  
Explanation  
Parental Lock  
Set Password  
In order to change the parental lock level or change  
the country/area code, set the password using this  
option. From the following screen, enter a four-digit  
number that will be your password.  
Change Password In order to change the password, first enter your  
existing password and then a new one from the  
following screen.  
Change Level  
From the following screen, first enter your password  
and then set a parental lock level.  
Country/Area  
Code  
From the following screen, first enter your password  
and then set a country/area code. See Country/Area  
code list on page 133.  
Only certain discs have parental lock and country/area code features. Check the disc packaging to see what features  
the disc has. If you forget your password you can reset it by resetting the recorder to its factory settings. See  
Resetting the recorder on page 136.  
Angle Indicator  
On •  
A camera icon appears on-screen during multi-angle  
scenes on a DVD-Video disc.  
Off  
Nothing is indicated on-screen when a multi-angle  
scene is showing.  
HDMI Output (only available when an HDMI device is connected)  
Screen Resolution  
1920 x 1080p  
1920 x 1080i  
1280 x 720p  
Constant 1920 x 1080p output.  
Constant 1920 x 1080i output.  
Constant 1280 x 720p output.  
720 x 576p  
(720 x 480p)  
Constant 720 x 576p output (when setting the Input  
Line System to 525 System, video is output in  
720 x 480p).  
720 x 576i  
(720 x 480i)  
Constant 720 x 576i output (when setting the Input  
Line System to 525 System, video is output in  
720 x 480i).  
• Depending on the connected device some settings may not be available.  
• If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case,  
press OPEN/CLOSE while holding down the (Stop) button on the front panel to switch the setting (this also  
switches Component Video Out on page 110 to the default setting).  
4:3 Video Output  
Full  
Select if your HDMI TV allows you to change the  
aspect ratio.  
Normal  
Select if your HDMI TV does not allow you to change  
the aspect ratio. 4:3 video will be shown with bars on  
each side.  
116  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
14  
Setting  
Colour  
Options  
Explanation  
RGB (0–255)  
Use if colours are weak and black appears to ‘float’  
on the RGB (16–235) setting.  
RGB (16–235)  
YCbCr 4:2:2  
Use this setting if colours appear overly rich and the  
black too deep on the RGB (0–255) setting.  
The video signal is output as a YCbCr 4:2:2  
component signal. This is the standard setting for  
HDMI-compatible devices.  
YCbCr 4:4:4  
The video signal is output as a YCbCr 4:4:4  
component signal.  
• Depending on the connected device some settings may not be available.  
• When a DVI device is connected, the YCbCr 4:2:2 and YCbCr 4:4:4 options are not available.  
Transmission Mode Auto  
Select this setting to output video in the optimum  
transmission mode according to the connected  
device.  
Normal  
Select this setting when pictures are not shown  
properly.  
If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case,  
press OPEN/CLOSE while holding down the (Stop) button on the front panel to switch the setting.  
Audio Output  
Auto •  
Dolby Digital, MPEG and DTS sources are output as a  
bitstream signal. However, depending on the Audio  
Out setting, number of audio channels, and the HDMI-  
connected device, Linear PCM audio may be output.  
PCM  
All audio signals are converted to Linear PCM (except  
DTS).  
Bitstream Priority Select if the connected device is compatible with  
bitstream audio.  
This setting is not available when a DVI device is connected.  
HDMI Control  
On •  
Off  
Enable the HDMI Control function. Select this option  
when connected to an HDMI Control-compatible  
Pioneer plasma television, AV system (amplifier or AV  
receiver etc.).  
Disable the HDMI Control function. Select this option  
when not connected to an HDMI Control-compatible  
component, or when connected to a component  
manufactured by a company other than Pioneer.  
• For more information about HDMI Control, see HDMI Control on page 22.  
• This setting is available even if you are not connected to an HDMI device.  
• For more information see Troubleshooting on page 127.  
117  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
14  
Setting  
Options  
Options  
Explanation  
On Screen Display On •  
The recorder displays operation displays (Stop, Play,  
etc.) on-screen.  
Off  
Switches off the on-screen operation displays.  
Front Panel Display On •  
The time is shown in the front panel display when the  
recorder is in standby.  
Off  
The front panel display is switched off in standby.  
Remote Control  
Mode  
Recorder 1–3  
(default: Recorder 1)  
If you are using more than one recorder in the same  
room, set them to different IDs. This setting sets the  
recorder ID; to change the remote controller ID,  
press and hold RETURN then press 1, 2 or 3 to set.  
The remote will only control a recorder with the same  
ID.  
DivX VOD  
Registration Code Use to display the recorder’s DivX registration code.  
See DivX video compatibility and DivX® VOD content  
on page 10.  
Set Preview  
(HDD only)  
Quick Preview •  
When in the Disc Navigator, the thumbnail video  
plays short excerpts from throughout the selected  
title. (Note that edited titles that will play normally  
from the beginning.)  
Normal  
The thumbnail video plays from the beginning of the  
title.  
Options 2  
USB  
Restart USB  
Device  
If the connected USB device does not respond to the  
recorder, try using this option to restart it. If the  
device still does not work properly try switching it off  
then back on, and/or disconnecting then  
reconnecting the USB cable.  
Confirm Printer  
Proceed  
Use this option to confirm the make and model of the  
printer connected to the recorder (does not work with  
all printers).  
HDD Sleep Mode  
Puts the HDD to sleep. Using this feature when  
playing DVDs or CDs allows you to reduce noise  
produced by the unit, resulting in improved sound  
quality. When you wake the HDD back up it will take  
a few seconds to load.  
The HDD can be taken out of Sleep Mode by any  
number of actions, including:  
Turning the power off and on again.  
• Pressing the HDD/DVD button and choosing the  
HDD.  
• When a timer recording begins.  
• When you try and make any changes to system  
settings.  
118  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
14  
About the input colour system  
The available options of the Input Colour  
System setting depend on the Input Line  
System setting. The tables below show the  
different options available.  
Additional information about the  
TV system settings  
About the input line system  
This recorder is compatible with PAL,  
SECAM, 3.58 NTSC and PAL-60 TV systems.  
The Input Line System and Input Colour  
System settings determine how the recorder  
treats incoming video signals from an  
external input or the built-in TV tuner.  
Please note the following points when  
changing the input line system:  
• If, when the Input Line System setting is  
changed, the screen goes blank (due to  
incompatibility with your TV), you can  
switch back by pressing and holding the  
front panel (Stop) button then  
pressing INPUT SELECT (also front  
panel) while the recorder is stopped.  
• When you switch the Input Line System  
setting the Copy List is erased. If you  
switch the setting using the (Stop)  
button and INPUT SELECT buttons as  
described above, there is no  
Taiwan and Philippines model:  
Input Line  
System  
External  
input  
Built-in tuner  
625 System  
525 System  
Other:  
n/a  
Auto  
PAL  
SECAM  
Auto  
3.58 NTSC  
3.58 NTSC  
PAL–60  
Input Line  
System  
External  
input  
Built-in tuner  
625 System  
525 System  
Auto  
Auto  
confirmation, so please use with care.  
PAL  
PAL  
• You can’t mix recordings of different TV  
line systems on the same disc.  
SECAM  
3.58 NTSC  
SECAM  
Auto  
• When you change this setting, the Input  
Colour System setting also changes  
(page 119).  
3.58 NTSC  
PAL–60  
About NTSC on PAL TV  
Depending on the Input Line System setting  
and the NTSC on PAL TV setting, the signal  
format output when the recorder is stopped  
varies as shown in the table below.  
Additional information about  
component video output  
If you switch the Component Video Out  
setting to Progressive when using a TV that  
is not compatible with progressive-scan  
video, you will not be able to see anything  
displayed on your TV. If this happens, press  
and hold the (Stop) button on the front  
panel, then press OPEN/CLOSE. This will  
set the recorder’s video output back to  
Interlace.  
Output  
when  
stopped  
Input Line  
System  
NTSC on PAL  
TV  
625 System  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
PAL  
PAL  
525 System  
NTSC  
PAL–60  
119  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Initial Setup menu  
14  
Selecting other languages  
for language options  
ENTER  
1
Select ‘Other’ from the  
language list.  
This option appears in the settings for DVD  
Menu Language, Audio Language, and  
Subtitle Language.  
ENTER  
2
Select the language you  
want.  
Initial Setup  
Basic  
OSD DVD Menu Language  
Audio
Tuner  
Language  
English  
Video In/Out  
Audio In  
Subti
Number  
Auto
0
1
4
5
Audio Out  
Language  
Recording  
Playback  
DVD
Subti
• Select by language name: Use the /  
buttons to change the language.  
• Select by code number: Press then  
use the number buttons to enter the  
four-digit language code.  
See Language code list on page 133 for a list  
of available languages and corresponding  
codes.  
120  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
15  
Chapter 15  
Additional information  
Minimum copying times  
The table below shows the minimum HDD to DVD copying time for one hour of video.  
1
Please note that not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying. Check with the disc  
manufacturer for compatibility.  
Rec mode  
SEP  
SLP  
EP  
LP  
SP  
XP  
DVD disc type  
10 h  
8 h  
6 h  
4 h  
2 h  
1 h  
DVD-R/1x  
DVD-RW/1x  
1x  
2x  
6 mins.  
3 mins.  
7.5 mins.  
4 mins.  
10 mins.  
5 mins.  
15 mins.  
7.5 mins.  
30 mins.  
15 mins.  
60 mins.  
30 mins.  
DVD-RW/2x  
DVD-R DL  
DVD-RAM/2x  
DVD+R/2.4x  
DVD+RW/2.4x  
DVD+R DL  
2.4x  
3x  
*1  
*1  
*1  
6.3 mins.  
5 mins.  
12.5 mins.  
10 mins.  
25 mins.  
20 mins.  
DVD-RAM/3x  
DVD-RAM/5x  
2 mins.  
2.5 mins.  
3.5 mins.  
DVD-R/4x  
DVD-RW/4x  
DVD+R/4x  
4x  
6x  
1.5 mins.*1  
2 mins.*1  
2.5 mins.*1  
4 mins.  
3 mins.  
7.5 mins.  
5.5 mins.  
15 mins.  
11 mins.  
DVD+RW/4x  
DVD-R/8x/16x  
DVD+R/8x/16x  
DVD-RW/6x  
1.25 mins.*1 1.6 mins.*1 2.2 mins.*1  
DVD+RW/8x  
Note that all times in the above table are approximate. Also that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc  
being recorded.  
*1 Titles recorded on DVD+R/+RW in SEP, SLP or EP modes cannot be high-speed copied.  
Note  
1 Depending on the disc, the copy speed may be reduced (for example, although a 6x disc is used, the copy may  
be made at 2x speed).  
121  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Manual recording modes  
15  
The table below shows the approximate recording times for different DVD types in each  
manual recording mode, as well as the standard recording mode equivalents. For recording  
time on the HDD, see Specifications on page 137.  
Rec. time*1  
Resolution*2  
Single-Layer  
DVD:  
DVD-R/-RW  
DVD+R/+RW  
DVD-RAM  
Video mode On (HDD)  
Video mode (DVD-R/-RW)  
DVD+R/+RW  
Video mode (DVD-R DL)  
DVD+R DL  
Dual-Layer  
DVD:  
DVD-R DL  
DVD+R DL  
Video mode Off (HDD)  
VR mode (DVD-R/-RW)  
DVD-RAM  
VR mode (DVD-R DL)  
Level  
*3,4  
802 mins.  
720 mins.  
600 mins.  
480 mins.  
420 mins.  
360 mins.  
1440 mins.  
1292 mins.  
1077 mins.  
861 mins.  
754 mins.  
646 mins.  
MN 1  
MN 2  
MN 3  
MN 4  
MN 5  
*3,4  
*3,4  
*4  
SEP  
SLP  
352 x 240/  
352 x 288  
352 x 240/  
352 x 288  
*4  
*4  
EP  
LP  
MN 6  
MN 7  
MN 8  
MN 9  
300 mins.  
270 mins.  
240 mins.  
230 mins.  
220 mins.  
210 mins.  
200 mins.  
190 mins.  
180 mins.  
170 mins.  
160 mins.  
150 mins.  
140 mins.  
130 mins.  
120 mins.  
110 mins.  
105 mins.  
100 mins.  
95 mins.  
90 mins.  
85 mins.  
80 mins.  
75 mins.  
70 mins.  
65 mins.  
61 mins.  
61 mins.  
--- mins.  
538 mins.  
484 mins.  
431 mins.  
413 mins.  
395 mins.  
377 mins.  
359 mins.  
341 mins.  
323 mins.  
305 mins.  
287 mins.  
269 mins.  
251 mins.  
233 mins.  
215 mins.  
197 mins.  
188 mins.  
179 mins.  
170 mins.  
161 mins.  
153 mins.  
144 mins.  
135 mins.  
126 mins.  
117 mins.  
111 mins.  
111 mins.  
--- mins.  
352 x 480/  
352 x 576  
352 x 480/  
352 x 576  
480 x 480/  
480 x 576  
MN 10  
MN 11  
MN 12  
MN 13  
MN 14  
MN 15  
MN 16  
MN 17  
MN 18  
MN 19  
MN 20  
MN 21  
MN 22  
MN 23  
MN 24  
MN 25  
MN 26  
MN 27  
MN 28  
MN 29  
MN 30  
MN 31  
MN 32  
LPCM  
544 x 480/  
544 x 576  
SP  
720 x 480/  
720 x 576  
720 x 480/  
720 x 576  
XP  
*5  
XP+  
*1  
*2  
*3  
*4  
*5  
Recording time may be slightly shorter for certain disc types or recording modes.  
The first figure refers to when the Input Line System is set to 525 System; the second when set to 625 System.  
Modes MN1 to MN3 not available when using DVD+R/+RW.  
Titles recorded at MN6 or lower cannot be high-speed copied to DVD+R/+RW.  
XP+ mode is available for HDD recordings only. If set for a DVD recording, the DVD will be automatically recorded  
in MN32 mode.  
122  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
15  
Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in picture quality.  
Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2 ch format, except for LPCM mode, which is  
in Linear PCM format.  
See also Recording on page 32.  
Troubleshooting  
Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is  
something wrong with this component, please check the points below. Sometimes the  
trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical  
appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the points below,  
ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.  
General  
Problem  
Remedy  
The disc is  
• Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 7).  
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and  
label-side up).  
automatically ejected  
after closing the disc  
tray  
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 135).  
• Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder.  
Can’t eject a disc  
Can’t play a disc  
• Turn off the power to this device and press and hold OPEN/  
CLOSE on the front of the unit for more than three seconds.  
• Check that the disc is a compatible format disc (page 7).  
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 135).  
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and  
label-side up).  
• Press HDD/DVD to select the DVD.  
• There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for  
an hour or so for the condensation to evaporate.  
• During HDD recording, you can’t play discs that are recorded with  
a Line System different to the current recorder setting.  
• DVD+R/+RW discs recorded using another recorder with copy-  
once protected recordings will not play in this recorder.  
Can’t record a disc  
No picture  
• Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 7).  
• Some DVD-RAM discs are not recordable until they have been  
initialized (page 49). This can take up to an hour.  
• Check that everything is connected properly (page 14).  
• Check that the connected TV and/or the AV amplifier/receiver is set  
to the correct input.  
• The recorder may be set to progressive scan with an incompatible  
TV. Reset to interlace by pressing and holding the front panel  
(Stop) button then pressing OPEN/CLOSE.  
All settings are reset  
• If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the  
recorder is on, all the settings will be lost.  
• Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before  
unplugging the power cord.  
123  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
15  
Problem  
Remedy  
Remote control does  
not work  
• If you connected this recorder to another Pioneer product using the  
CONTROL IN jack, point the remote control at the other component  
to use (page 14).  
• Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder  
(page 118). (When the batteries run down, the remote mode is  
automatically reset to Recorder1.)  
• Use the remote within its operating range (page 6).  
• Replace the batteries (page 6).  
No sound or sound is  
distorted  
• Make sure that the amplifier/receiver or TV is set to the correct  
input and the volume turned up.  
• There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning  
or slow motion play. Press PLAY to resume regular playback.  
• DTS discs can only be played if this recorder is connected to a DTS  
decoder or DTS compatible amplifier/receiver. If you have connected  
a suitable decoder, also make sure that the Initial Setup > Audio  
Out > DTS Out setting is On.  
• Some 96 kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. In  
this case, switch the input of your amplifier/receiver to analog.  
• Check the audio cable connections (page 14).  
• If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs.  
Cannot switch a dual  
mono/bilingual  
programme  
• During real-time copying it is not possible to switch audio  
channels. The main and sub channels are both output.  
The picture is  
distorted  
• Change the Input Line System setting (page 108). (You can also  
change it by pressing the (Stop) button and INPUT SELECT on the  
front panel simultaneously with the recorder stopped.)  
The picture from the  
external input is  
distorted  
• If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected,  
you cannot connect via this recorder. Connect the component  
directly to your TV.  
Screen is stretched  
vertically or  
• Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 115) is correct for  
the kind of TV you have (see also page 134).  
horizontally  
• If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings.  
• This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically  
according to the input signal. When the unit connected is not  
compatible with VIDEO ID-1 (widescreen signalling), set the  
connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio (standard) video.  
124  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
15  
Problem  
Remedy  
Can’t play a disc  
recorded using this  
recorder on another  
player  
• If the disc was recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R,  
make sure that it’s finalized (page 48).  
• Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when  
recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R and finalized.  
• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be  
specifically RW compatible in order to play it (page 7).  
• Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non-  
CPRM compatible players (page 35).  
• DVD+RW discs containing only a small amount of recorded material  
may not play on other players. Finalize the disc and try again.  
During playback the  
picture is dark or  
distorted  
• When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not  
display correctly. Connect the recorder directly to your TV.  
Recorded contents are • Change the recording mode to XP/SP.  
not clear or artefacts  
appear in areas of flat  
colour (due to MPEG  
compression; also  
known as block noise)  
Can’t record or does  
not record  
successfully  
• Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD.  
• For a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R, check that the disc isn’t  
already finalized.  
• Check the limits on the number of titles and chapters on a disc:  
– HDD: 999 titles  
– VR mode: 99 titles, 999 chapters per disc  
– Video mode disc: 99 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title  
– DVD+R/+RW: 49 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title (max  
254 chapters per disc)  
• Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected.  
• For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t locked (page 102).  
• Check that you are recording with the same TV system (PAL, NTSC,  
etc.) as the disc has already been recorded in. All recordings on a  
disc must be in the same TV system. When recording to the HDD, it  
is also necessary to set the Input Line System setting to match what  
you want to record (page 108).  
• The power may have failed during recording.  
Timer programme  
doesn’t record  
successfully  
• When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the  
recorder’s built-in TV tuner, not the TV’s built-in tuner.  
• When recording to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW,  
programmes that are copy-once protected cannot be recorded. Use a  
VR mode formatted disc for copy-once material (page 35).  
Two timer programmes may have overlapped, in which case only  
the earlier one will record completely.  
• The power may have failed during recording.  
• Check that the recorder’s TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) settings are  
the same as the channel set for recording.  
125  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
15  
Problem  
Remedy  
After briefly  
• A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other  
unplugging or after a settings from being reset when there is no power to the recorder.  
power failure the  
front panel display  
shows ‘--:--’  
After unplugging or a power failure, the battery keeps all settings for  
some five years from the date it was shipped from the factory. Reset  
the clock and other recorder settings to use the recorder again.  
To have the battery replaced, please ask your nearest Pioneer-  
authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs.  
Front panel display  
shows ‘LOCKED’ when  
a button is pressed  
• The child lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 45).  
Can’t use One Touch  
Copy (HDD to DVD)  
• Make sure that there is a recordable DVD-R/-RW loaded with some  
free space for recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc.  
Also make sure that for a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or a DVD+R, the  
disc isn’t finalized.  
• Make sure there is a recordable DVD+R/+RW loaded with some  
free space for recording and fewer than 49 titles already on the disc.  
• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the number of  
remaining recordable titles may not decrease.  
• Further recording is not possible on a finalized DVD+R. Check that  
there isn’t a disc menu on the disc you’re trying to use.  
• If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once  
protected, One Touch Copy will not work.  
• If the currently playing HDD content was recorded in XP+ mode,  
the One Touch Copy feature can’t be used.  
• One Touch Copy can’t be used for titles over eight hours long when  
copying to DVD+R/+RW (though you can use a DVD+R DL).  
• One Touch Copy can’t be used for MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP  
titles when copying to DVD+R/+RW.  
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to DVD.  
Can’t use One Touch  
Copy (DVD to HDD)  
• Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there  
are fewer than 999 titles on the HDD.  
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to  
the HDD.  
The device connected • Check that the device is compatible with this recorder (page 23).  
to the USB port is not • Use a USB cable less than 5 m in length.  
recognized  
• Check that the USB cable is inserted fully.  
• Check that the USB device is powered on.  
• Try switching this recorder into standby mode and then back on.  
• Try using the Restart USB Device option from the Initial Setup  
menu (page 118).  
• If several USB devices (camera, USB memory, card reader, etc.) are  
connected at the same time, it’s possible that only the first device  
connected to this recorder will be recognized.  
File names are not  
displayed properly.  
• Files names that do not conform to the ISO8859-1 standard may not  
display correctly on this unit.  
126  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
15  
HDMI  
Problem  
Remedy  
The connected HDMI  
• Try disconnecting then reconnecting the HDMI cable (while the  
or DVI device does not power of both components is on).  
display any picture  
(and the front panel  
HDMI indicator does  
not light)  
• Try switching the power of the HDMI/DVI device off then back on.  
• Try switching off the HDMI/DVI device and this recorder. Next,  
switch on the HDMI/DVI device and leave it for around 30 seconds,  
then switch on this recorder.  
• When you connect an HDMI-compatible device make sure of the  
following:  
– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this unit.  
– The cable you’re using is fully HDMI-compliant. Using a non-  
standard cable may result in no picture being output.  
– Don’t use several HDMI cables connected together. Use a single  
cable to connect devices together.  
• When you connect a DVI-compatible device make sure of the  
following:  
– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this unit.  
– The DVI terminal on the connected device is HDCP-compatible.  
– The connected device is compatible with NTSC (720 x 480i/p,  
1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) and PAL (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p,  
1920 x 1080i/p) video input.  
• If the recorder’s internal HDD is damaged or broken, there will be  
no HDMI output.  
• Not all HDCP-compatible DVI devices will work with this recorder.  
No video from the  
HDMI output  
• If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may  
not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press OPEN/  
CLOSE while holding down the (Stop) button on the front panel to  
switch the setting (this also switches Component Video Out on  
page 110 to the default setting).  
There’s no sound from • There is no sound when using a DVI terminal.  
the connected HDMI  
• Some HDMI-compatible devices do not output sound (check with  
or DVI device  
the manual that came with the connected device).  
The power  
• This unit’s power may be turned on each time you turn on the  
automatically turns on power for a connected plasma television. If you do not want this unit  
to be turned on in this way, set this unit’s HDMI Control to OFF  
(page 117).  
Can’t record video  
• When using HDMI Control to record, you must make sure that the  
channel information for the plasma television matches that of this  
unit. If the channel information does not match you cannot make  
recordings. Use the Auto Channel Setting function to set this unit’s  
channel information (page 109).  
127  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
15  
Problem  
Remedy  
HDMI Control does  
not respond  
• Verify that the HDMI cable is firmly connected (page 21).  
• Check whether HDMI Control is set to On for this unit and the  
device connected to this unit. For more information, refer to the  
operating instructions of your plasma television or AV system.  
• Depending on the type of plasma television, some HDMI input  
terminals do not support the HDMI Control function. For details, see  
the operating instructions supplied with your plasma television.  
• HDMI Control may not operate properly if you do not use an HDMI  
cable that supports the HDMI 1.3 Specification.  
• This function may not work properly if you have multiple recorders  
connected to a single plasma television or AV system. For more  
information, refer to the operating instructions of your plasma  
television or AV system.  
• Controls may not function properly in certain situations, such as  
immediately after you have connect an HDMI cable, turn this unit’s  
power off or remove the power cable for this unit or the connected  
component. If you experience any problems, set HDMI Control to On  
for all connected units, and then display the pictures stored on this  
unit on your plasma television to improve the situations.  
• Check whether the connected component supports HDMI Control  
or not.  
• Certain functions are not supported on with plasma televisions and  
AV systems.  
• We cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI Control-  
compatible components other than those made by Pioneer. When  
using HDMI Control-compatible components manufactured by  
companies other than Pioneer, set the HDMI Control to Off  
(page 117).  
If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect  
the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.  
If the picture freezes and the front panel and remote control  
buttons stop working  
• Press (Stop) then try restarting  
STANDBY/ON  
playback.  
• Press the front panel STANDBY/ON  
button to switch the power off, then  
HDD/DVD  
OPEN/CLOSE  
switch back on and restart playback. If  
the power fails to switch off, press and  
hold STANDBY/ON for five seconds  
until the power switches off.  
DivX  
C
OP  
Y
STANDBY/ON  
DV IN  
USB  
STOP REC  
INPUT  
SELECT  
CH  
128  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
On-screen displays  
15  
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the  
recorder and an explanation of their meaning.  
Message  
Explanation/Action  
• Initializing disc. Please wait a  
moment.  
When you load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc,  
the recorder automatically initializes it.  
• Incompatible region number.  
The disc loaded has an incompatible region  
number for the recorder and so will not play.  
• Cannot record any more titles.  
• No more space for file management  
data.  
The disc control data limit has been reached, or  
the maximum number of chapters and/or titles has  
been reached. Erase titles/chapters or combine  
chapters.  
• This disc cannot be recorded. Undo  
the finalization.  
The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD  
recorder. Undo the finalization in order to  
recording/editing.  
• Cannot play this disc.  
• This disc cannot be recorded.  
• Cannot read the CPRM information.  
• Could not record the information to  
the disc.  
The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the  
disc, clean it and retry. If the error persists, use a  
new disc. If the error appears even with a new disc,  
please ask your nearest Pioneer-authorized service  
center or your dealer to carry out repairs.  
• Cannot edit.  
• Could not initialize disc.  
• Could not complete finalization  
successfully.  
• Could not undo finalization  
successfully.  
• Could not successfully unlock the  
disc.  
• Incompatible or unreadable disc.  
The disc loaded is a playback-only disc type. This  
display may also appear if the disc is dirty or  
damaged.  
• Cannot record to a disc that is not  
CPRM compatible.  
The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR  
mode DVD-R/-RW disc with CPRM for recording.  
• Cannot record this content using  
Video mode recording.  
• This video cannot be recorded to  
DVD+R/+RW.  
• This content is copy protected.  
The video source is copy-protected and cannot be  
recorded.  
• Incorrect CPRM information.  
The recorder could not read the CPRM  
information. The recorder may be damaged —  
please ask your nearest Pioneer-authorized service  
center or your dealer to carry out repairs.  
129  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
15  
Message  
Explanation/Action  
• Repairing disc.  
• Repairing the HDD.  
During recording, the power was cut. This display  
appears when the power is restored.  
• Could not repair the disc.  
The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a  
power cut. The contents of the recording will be  
lost.  
• Overheating has stopped operation.  
Press DISPLAY to clear message.  
The internal temperature of the recorder has  
exceeded the operating limit. If this message  
reappears, please ask your nearest Pioneer-  
authorized service center or your dealer to carry  
out repairs.  
• HDD optimization is recommended.  
This can be done using Disc Setup.  
The HDD should be optimized (basically, HDD  
housekeeping) to maintain playback and recording  
performance.  
• Please perform HDD optimization.  
This can be done using Disc Setup.  
The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in  
order to maintain performance.  
• The HDD has not been sufficiently  
optimized. Please optimize again.  
If this message appears repeatedly after  
optimizing the HDD it is likely that there is not  
enough free space on the HDD for optimization to  
complete properly. Please erase some titles from  
the HDD and optimize again.  
• An error occurred. Please consult the This message is displayed when information from  
service center. Note that contents on the HDD cannot be read. The HDD may be  
the HDD may be erased when servicing damaged or broken. Please ask your nearest  
this unit.  
Pioneer-authorized service center or your dealer to  
carry out repairs.  
• The Hard Disk Drive info is incorrect.  
As the HDD info cannot be properly read, no new  
Use the Disc Setup menu to reinitialize. recordings can be made. Reinitializing the HDD  
(page 104) may result in your being able to make  
recording again. Note that reinitializing the HDD  
will erase all recorded contents, including  
protected files.  
• There is no DV input or the input  
signal is unrecordable.  
No signal was detected at the DV IN jack. This may  
appear if a blank section of DV tape is playing in  
the connected camcorder.  
• No DV camcorder connected.  
The camcorder is not connected properly, or the  
camcorder is switched off.  
• You cannot connect more than one  
DV camcorder at a time.  
This recorder’s DV jack supports connection to  
just one camcorder.  
• Cannot operate the DV camcorder.  
This recorder cannot operate the DV camcorder.  
Try switching off the camcorder then turn it back  
on again.  
130  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
15  
Message  
Explanation/Action  
• Could not operate the DV camcorder. This recorder was not able to operate the DV  
camcorder.  
• The DV camcorder is not set for  
The camcorder is in camera mode. Switch it to  
playback. Please select playback mode playback mode.  
on the DV camcorder.  
• The printer is not ready or is not  
connected. Please check the printer.  
This message is displayed when communication  
could not be established with the printer. See the  
Troubleshooting section if you do not know the  
cause.  
• Printing has been cancelled  
because ...  
This message is displayed when there is a printer  
error during printing. After checking the printer for  
the cause of the error, either reconnect the printer  
and start the printing job again, or select “Yes” to  
resume printing (select “No” to cancel the print  
job). See also the operating instructions that came  
with your printer for possible causes of print errors.  
Front panel displays  
The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the  
recorder and an explanation of their meaning.  
Message  
• E01  
Explanation/Action  
The HDD may be damaged or broken. Please ask  
your nearest Pioneer-authorized service center or  
your dealer to carry out repairs.  
• E02  
As the HDD info cannot be properly read, no new  
recordings can be made. Reinitializing the HDD  
(page 104) may result in your being able to make  
recording again. Note that reinitializing the HDD  
will erase all recorded contents, including  
protected files.  
131  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
15  
Setting up the remote to  
control your TV  
Maker  
Alba  
Code  
66  
You can use the supplied remote to control  
your TV. To be able to use this feature you  
first have to program the remote with a  
maker code from the table below.  
Bush  
76  
Fisher  
61, 65  
77  
Fujitsu  
Funai  
1
Press and hold down the CLEAR  
67  
button, then enter the maker code for  
your TV.  
The LED indicator on the remote controls  
lights.  
Goldstar  
Grandiente  
Grundig  
Hitachi  
ITT  
79  
87  
51, 82  
56, 60, 83, 86  
70  
See the table below for the list of maker  
codes. If there is more than one code given  
for your make, input the first one in the list.  
• If the maker’s name of your TV doesn’t  
appear in the table below, you will not be  
able to use this remote to control your  
TV.  
Mitsubishi  
Nokia  
59  
53, 81  
58, 72  
57, 85, 89  
50, 80  
68  
Panasonic  
Philips  
Pioneer  
RCA  
2
Press TV to check that the remote  
works with your TV.  
If the remote is set up correctly, the TV  
should switch on/off. If it doesn’t and there is  
another code given for your maker, repeat  
step 1 with a new code.  
Salora  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
71  
Using the TV remote control  
buttons  
The table below shows how to use this  
remote control with your TV.  
73, 75  
74  
Sei  
78  
Button  
What it does  
Sharp  
52  
TV  
Press to switch the TV on/  
off (standby)  
Sony  
54  
Tandy  
69  
INPUT SELECT Press to change the TV’s  
video input  
Telefunken  
Thomson  
Toshiba  
JVC  
64  
TV VOLUME  
Use to adjust the TV  
volume  
62, 89  
55  
TV CHANNEL Use to change TV channels  
63  
132  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
15  
Language code list  
Language (Language code letter), Language code  
Japanese (ja), 1001  
English (en), 0514  
French (fr), 0618  
German (de), 0405  
Italian (it), 0920  
Spanish (es), 0519  
Chinese (zh), 2608  
Dutch (nl), 1412  
Portuguese (pt), 1620  
Swedish (sv), 1922  
Russian (ru), 1821  
Greek (el), 0512  
Bhutani (dz), 0426  
Esperanto (eo), 0515  
Estonian (et), 0520  
Basque (eu), 0521  
Persian (fa), 0601  
Finnish (fi), 0609  
Fiji (fj), 0610  
Faroese (fo), 0615  
Frisian (fy), 0625  
Kirghiz (ky), 1125  
Latin (la), 1201  
Lingala (ln), 1214  
Laotian (lo), 1215  
Lithuanian (lt), 1220  
Latvian (lv), 1222  
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908  
Sinhalese (si), 1909  
Slovak (sk), 1911  
Slovenian (sl), 1912  
Samoan (sm), 1913  
Shona (sn), 1914  
Somali (so), 1915  
Albanian (sq), 1917  
Serbian (sr), 1918  
Siswati (ss), 1919  
Sesotho (st), 1920  
Sundanese (su), 1921  
Swahili (sw), 1923  
Tamil (ta), 2001  
Telugu (te), 2005  
Tajik (tg), 2007  
Thai (th), 2008  
Tigrinya (ti), 2009  
Turkmen (tk), 2011  
Tagalog (tl), 2012  
Setswana (tn), 2014  
Tonga (to), 2015  
Malagasy (mg), 1307  
Maori (mi), 1309  
Macedonian (mk), 1311  
Malayalam (ml), 1312  
Mongolian (mn), 1314  
Moldavian (mo), 1315  
Marathi (mr), 1318  
Malay (ms), 1319  
Maltese (mt), 1320  
Burmese (my), 1325  
Nauru (na), 1401  
Nepali (ne), 1405  
Occitan (oc), 1503  
Oromo (om), 1513  
Oriya (or), 1518  
Irish (ga), 0701  
Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704  
Galician (gl), 0712  
Guarani (gn), 0714  
Gujarati (gu), 0721  
Hausa (ha), 0801  
Hindi (hi), 0809  
Croatian (hr), 0818  
Hungarian (hu), 0821  
Armenian (hy), 0825  
Interlingua (ia), 0901  
Interlingue (ie), 0905  
Inupiak (ik), 0911  
Indonesian (in), 0914  
Icelandic (is), 0919  
Hebrew (iw), 0923  
Yiddish (ji), 1009  
Javanese (jw), 1023  
Georgian (ka), 1101  
Kazakh (kk), 1111  
Greenlandic (kl), 1112  
Cambodian (km), 1113  
Kannada (kn), 1114  
Korean (ko), 1115  
Kashmiri (ks), 1119  
Kurdish (ku), 1121  
Polish (pl), 1612  
Czech (cs), 0319  
Norwegian (no), 1415  
Afar (aa), 0101  
Abkhazian (ab), 0102  
Afrikaans (af), 0106  
Amharic (am), 0113  
Arabic (ar), 0118  
Assamese (as), 0119  
Aymara (ay), 0125  
Azerbaijani (az), 0126  
Bashkir (ba), 0201  
Byelorussian (be), 0205  
Bulgarian (bg), 0207  
Bihari (bh), 0208  
Bislama (bi), 0209  
Bengali (bn), 0214  
Tibetan (bo), 0215  
Breton (br), 0218  
Catalan (ca), 0301  
Corsican (co), 0315  
Welsh (cy), 0325  
Panjabi (pa), 1601  
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Turkish (tr), 2018  
Quechua (qu), 1721  
Rhaeto-Romance (rm),  
1813  
Kirundi (rn), 1814  
Romanian (ro), 1815  
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823  
Sanskrit (sa), 1901  
Sindhi (sd), 1904  
Sangho (sg), 1907  
Tsonga (ts), 2019  
Tatar (tt), 2020  
Twi (tw), 2023  
Ukrainian (uk), 2111  
Urdu (ur), 2118  
Uzbek (uz), 2126  
Vietnamese (vi), 2209  
Volapük (vo), 2215  
Wolof (wo), 2315  
Xhosa (xh), 2408  
Yoruba (yo), 2515  
Zulu (zu), 2621  
Danish (da), 0401  
Country/Area code list  
Country/Area, Country/Area code, Code letter  
Argentina, 0118, ar  
Australia, 0121, au  
Austria, 0120, at  
Belgium, 0205, be  
Brazil, 0218, br  
Canada, 0301, ca  
Chile, 0312, cl  
Finland, 0609, fi  
France, 0618, fr  
Germany, 0405, de  
Hong Kong, 0811, hk  
India, 0914, in  
Indonesia, 0904, id  
Italy, 0920, it  
Malaysia, 1325, my  
Mexico, 1324, mx  
Netherlands, 1412, nl  
New Zealand, 1426, nz  
Norway, 1415, no  
Pakistan, 1611, pk  
Philippines, 1608, ph  
Portugal, 1620, pt  
Singapore, 1907, sg  
Spain, 0519, es  
Sweden, 1905, se  
Switzerland, 0308, ch  
Taiwan, 2023, tw  
Thailand, 2008, th  
United Kingdom, 0702, gb  
USA, 2119, us  
China, 0314, cn  
Japan, 1016, jp  
Denmark, 0411, dk  
Republic of Korea, 1118  
,
kr  
Russian Federation, 1821 ru  
,
133  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
15  
Screen sizes and disc formats  
When viewing on a standard TV or monitor  
Screen format of disc Setting  
Appearance  
16:9  
4:3 (Letter Box)  
4:3 (Pan & Scan)  
The programme is shown in widescreen with  
black bars at the top and bottom of the  
screen.  
The sides of the programme are cropped so  
that the picture fills the whole screen.  
4:3  
4:3 (Letter Box)  
4:3 (Pan & Scan)  
The programme is presented correctly on  
either setting.  
When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor  
Screen format of disc Setting  
Appearance  
16:9  
16:9  
The programme is presented in widescreen.  
4:3  
16:9  
Your TV will determine how the picture is  
presented — check the manual that came  
with the TV for details.  
134  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Handling discs  
15  
Damaged discs  
Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder.  
If you can see that a disc is cracked,  
chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged,  
don’t risk using it; you could end up  
damaging the recorder.  
When holding discs of any type, take care  
not to leave fingerprints, dirt or scratches on  
the disc surface. Hold the disc by its edge or  
by the center hole and edge.  
Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback  
and recording performance. Take care also  
not to scratch the label side of the disc.  
Although not as fragile as the recorded side,  
scratches can still result in a disc becoming  
unusable.  
This recorder is designed for use with  
conventional, fully circular discs only. Use of  
shaped discs is not recommended for this  
product. Pioneer disclaims all liability  
arising in connection with the use of shaped  
discs.  
Should a disc become marked with  
fingerprints, dust, etc., clean using a soft,  
dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly from the  
center to the outside edge. Do not wipe with  
a circular motion.  
Cleaning the pickup lens  
If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol,  
or a commercially available CD/DVD  
cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly.  
Never use benzine, thinner or other cleaning  
agents, including products designed for  
cleaning vinyl records.  
The HDD/DVD recorder’s lens should not  
become dirty in normal use, but if for some  
reason it should malfunction due to dust or  
dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-authorized  
service center. Although lens cleaners are  
commercially available, we do not  
recommend using them since some may  
damage the lens.  
Storing discs  
Although CDs and DVD discs are more  
durable than vinyl records, you should still  
take care to handle and store discs correctly.  
When you’re not using a disc, return it to its  
case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs  
in excessively cold, humid, or hot  
environments (including under direct  
sunlight).  
Condensation  
Condensation may form inside the recorder  
if it is brought into a warm room from  
outside, or if the temperature of the room  
rises quickly. Although the condensation  
won’t damage the recorder, it may  
temporarily impair its performance. For this  
reason you should leave it to adjust to the  
warmer temperature for about an hour  
before switching on and using.  
Don’t glue paper or put stickers onto the  
disc, or use a pencil, ball-point pen or other  
sharp-tipped writing instrument. These  
could all damage the disc.  
For more detailed care information see the  
instructions that come with discs.  
Do not load more than one disc into the  
recorder.  
135  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Hints on installation  
15  
Moving the recorder  
We want you to enjoy using this unit for years  
to come, so please bear in mind the  
following points when choosing a suitable  
location for it:  
If you need to move the recorder, first  
remove the disc, if loaded, and close the disc  
tray. Next, press STANDBY/ON to switch  
the power to standby, checking that the  
POWER OFF indication in the display goes  
off. Wait at least two minutes. Lastly,  
disconnect the power cord. Never lift or  
move the unit during playback or recording  
— discs rotate at a high speed and may be  
damaged.  
Do...  
Use in a well-ventilated room.  
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such  
as a table, shelf or stereo rack.  
Don’t...  
Resetting the recorder  
Use in a place exposed to high  
temperatures or humidity, including near  
radiators and other heat-generating  
appliances.  
If you need to, you can reset the recorder to  
all its factory settings.  
1
2
Make sure that the recorder is on.  
Using the front panel controls, press  
Place on a window sill or other place  
where the recorder will be exposed to direct  
sunlight.  
and hold (Stop) and press STANDBY/  
ON.  
The recorder turns off with all settings reset.  
Use in a dusty or damp environment or  
in a room where it will be exposed to  
excessive cigarette smoke.  
Place directly on top of an amplifier, or  
other component in your stereo system that  
becomes hot in use.  
Use near a television or monitor as you  
may experience interference — especially if  
the television uses an indoor antenna.  
Use in a kitchen or other room where the  
recorder may be exposed to smoke or steam.  
Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover  
with cloth — this may prevent proper cooling  
of the unit.  
Place on an unstable surface, or one that  
is not large enough to support all four of the  
unit’s feet.  
136  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
15  
Recording time  
HDD (500 GB)  
Specifications  
XP+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 72 h  
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 106 h  
Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 212 h  
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 424 h  
Extended Play (EP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 638 h  
Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 850 h  
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1064 h  
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 72 h to 1422 h  
General  
Power requirements  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz  
Power consumption  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 W  
Power consumption in standby mode  
(Front panel display: off)  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.38 W  
Weight  
DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, DVD-RAM  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6 kg  
Dimensions  
. . . . . . . . . . . .420 mm (W) x 77 mm (H) x 355 mm (D)  
Operating temperature  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +5 °C to +35 °C  
Operating humidity  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 % to 85 % (no condensation)  
TV system  
Taiwan and Philippines model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NTSC  
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAL/SECAM/NTSC  
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h  
Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 h  
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 h  
Extended Play (EP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 h  
Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 8 h  
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h  
(DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM only)  
Manual Mode (MN)  
DVD-R/-RW/-RAM. . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h to 13 h  
DVD+R/+RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approx. 1 h to 8 h  
Readable discs  
DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL  
DVD-Video, DVD-RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD+RW,  
DVD-RAM, Video CD, Super VCD, CD, CD-R/-RW  
(WMA, MP3, JPEG, CD-DA, DivX)  
Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m  
Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 3 h 35 m  
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 7 h 11 m  
Extended Play (EP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h 46 m  
Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 14 h 21 m  
Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . Approx. 17 h 57 m  
(DVD-R DL only)  
Recording discs and formats  
DVD-R/-RW: VR mode and Video mode  
DVD+R/+RW: +VR mode  
DVD-RAM: VR mode  
Manual Mode (MN)  
DVD-R DL: VR mode and Video mode  
DVD+R DL: +VR mode  
DVD-R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 24 h  
DVD+R DL . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 14 h 21 m  
Video recording format  
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 MHz  
Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MPEG  
Timer  
Programmes. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programmes  
Clock  
Audio recording format  
Taiwan and Philippines model. . . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock  
1
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 kHz  
Compression format . . . . Dolby Digital or Linear PCM  
(uncompressed)  
(12-hour digital display )  
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock  
(24-hour digital display)  
Note  
137  
En  
1 If the country is set to Philippines the clock switches to 24 hour display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
15  
Tuner  
Input/Output  
VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal  
Taiwan and Philippines model . . . VHF/UHF set 75 Ω  
(F-shape connector)  
Receivable channels  
Taiwan and Philippines model:  
Other . . . . . . . . . VHF/UHF set 75 Ω (IEC connector)  
Video Input 1 (rear), 2 (front), 3 (rear)  
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p (75 Ω)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks  
Video Output 1, 2  
NTSC-M/N  
Frequency  
Channel  
VHF  
UHF  
CATV  
55 MHz to 218 MHz  
471 MHz to 808 MHz  
2 to 13  
14 to 69  
STEREO  
M/N - BTSC  
72 MHz to 806 MHz C1 to C125  
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p (75 Ω)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks  
S-Video Input 1 (rear), 2 (front), 3 (rear)  
Y (luminance) - Input level. . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p (75 Ω)  
C (colour) - Input level  
Taiwan and Philippines model . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 Ω)  
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 Ω)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-pin mini DIN  
S-Video Output 1, 2  
Other:  
SECAM B/G  
PAL B/G  
PAL I  
Frequency  
Channel  
E2 to E4  
X to Z  
Frequency  
Channel  
A to C  
X to Z  
D to J  
11, 13  
VHF (low)  
VHF (high)  
47 MHz to 89 MHz  
44 MHz to 89 MHz  
104 MHz to 300 MHz E5 to E12 104 MHz to 300 MHz  
S1 to S20  
M1 to M10  
U1 to U10  
S1 to S20  
Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . .1 Vp-p (75 Ω)  
C (colour) - Output level  
Hyper  
UHF  
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41 302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41  
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69 470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69  
Taiwan and Philippines model . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 Ω)  
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 Ω)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-pin mini DIN  
Component video output  
SECAM D/K  
PAL D/K  
Frequency  
Channel  
VHF (low)  
VHF (high)  
49 MHz to 94 MHz  
R1 to R5  
104 MHz to 300 MHz R6 to R12  
S1 to S20  
302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41  
470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69  
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω)  
P , P : 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)  
B
R
Hyper  
UHF  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks  
Audio Input 1 (rear), 2 (front), 3 (rear) L/R  
During audio input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms  
(Input impedance: more than 22 kΩ)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks  
Audio Output 1, 2 L/R  
STEREO  
B/G - A2  
I - NICAM  
B/G - NICAM  
D/K - NICAM  
M/N - BTSC  
NTSC-M/N  
Frequency  
Channel  
VHF  
UHF  
CATV  
55 MHz to 218 MHz  
471 MHz to 808 MHz  
2 to 13  
14 to 69  
72 MHz to 806 MHz C1 to C125  
During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms  
(Output impedance: less than 1.5 kΩ)  
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks  
Other connections  
Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack  
Digital audio output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coaxial  
DV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-pin (front)  
(i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard)  
USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Type A (front), Type B (front)  
HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-pin  
Supplied accessories  
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Dry cell batteries (AA/R6P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
Audio/Video cable (red/white/yellow). . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
RF antenna cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Operating Instructions  
Note: The specifications and design of this product are  
subject to change without notice, due to improvement.  
®
This product includes FontAvenue fonts licenced  
by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered  
trademark of NEC Corporation.  
Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with  
permission from Microsoft Corporation.  
138  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PIONEER CORPORATION  
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411  
PIONEER EUROPE NV  
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.  
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.  
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270  
K002_B_En  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2007 Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
<VRB1477-A>  
Printed in China  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Pelco DVR DX8100 Series User Manual
Philips Cell Phone CT2898 User Manual
Philips Computer Monitor M1900 User Manual
Philips Cooktop HP1500 User Manual
Philips CRT Television TR2517C User Manual
Philips Indoor Furnishings PL L 25W User Manual
Philips Medical Alarms MP20 30 User Manual
Pioneer Welder CDJ 2000nexus User Manual
Poulan Chainsaw PP3816AV PP4218AV PP4218AVL User Manual
ProForm Treadmill 831295231 User Manual